New SM3 Service Manual Supplement

GENERAL INFORMATION
SECTION GI
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS ABBREVIATIONS
SRS Airbag ................................................................... 2 Abbreviations ............................................................. 2 7
General Precautions .................................................. 3
GENERAL SERVICE INFORMATION
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Connector Terminal Inspection .............................. 2 8
How to Use This Manual ........................................... 5 Electrical System Inspection .................................. 2 9
Components Diagram ................................................ 6 Lifting Point and Towing .......................................... 3 1
Symbols ........................................................................ 6 Tightening Torque of Standard Bolt ...................... 3 4
Trouble Diagnosis ....................................................... 7
How To Read Wiring Diagrams ............................... 8 IDENTIFICATION
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Vehical Model ............................................................. 3 5
Electrical Incident ..................................................... 1 4 Description for Vehicle Model Name ..................... 3 5
Vehicle Identification Number ................................ 3 6
HOW TO FOLLOW FLOW CHART
IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or
Procedures ................................................................ 2 5
Harness Connector Symbols ................................. 2 6
PRECAUTIONS
SRS Airbag
SRS Airbag • Pretensioner Seatbelt
The driver and passenger’s SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
airbag that is employed with the pretensioner seatbelt helps di-
minish the facial impact of both driver and passenger during fron-
tal crash.
The driver and passenger’s SRS side airbag, with the aid of
seatbelt, stiff body structure and energy-absorbing doors, also
helps diminish the facial and chest impact.
The SRS airbag and pretensioner seatbelt system consists of
GIA0129D_D1 driver airbag module (in center of steering wheel), passenger airbag
module (in passenger’s instrument panel), front side airbag mod-
ules (outer location of front seats), pretensioner seatbelt, airbag
sensor unit, spiral cable, side sensor, and warning light.
Refer to “RS Restraint System” in this service manual for safe
airbag system service.
WARNING:
z To install/remove the SRS airbag, pretensioner seatbelt
system related components and harness, turn the igni-
tion switch “OFF”, disconnect the battery terminals and
wait over 3 minutes. (This is to discharge all the remain-
ing electricity in the airbag sensor unit’s auxiliary power
circuit.)
z Do not use air impact or electrical tools when installing/
removing the components.
z Do not use any hand-held tools for harness used in SRS
airbag and pretensioner seatbelt systems. Be careful with
the harness not to tangle with or interfere with other
components.
z Do not use any electrical test equipments such as circuit
tester when inspecting the SRS airbag and pretensioner
seatbelt circuit while installed unless the Service Manual
instructs to do so. (The weak current in the tester can
cause the SRS airbag to operate.)
z Do not insert any foreign materials such as a screwdriver
in the airbag module and pretensioner seatbelt connec-
tor in order to prevent unintended operation due to static
electricity.
z The harnesses used in SRS airbag and pretensioner are
covered with yellow insulation for easy identification.
z Refer to “RS Restraint System” in this Service Manual for
safe airbag system service information.
GI-2
PRECAUTIONS
General Precautions
SAFE SERVICE
z Do not work while engine is running when there are no proper
air ventilation against exhaust gases.
z Keep the work site well ventilated and remove inflammable
materials. Be extra careful when working with inflammables or
poisonous materials such as gasoline or refrigerant.
z Dispose of used engine oils and other used cleansing liquids
according to the local laws.
z Be careful not to get burnt or hurt when working on hot or
GIA0010D_D1 moving parts.
z Place wheel blocks or tires to prevent the vehicle from moving
before lifting the vehicle with the garage jack.
z After lifting the vehicle, place supporting objects under the
vehicle to hold it firm.
z Hold or support the heavy components firmly such as the
engine or suspension parts when removing them.
GIA0012D_D1
z When there is no need of the battery power, always place the

ignition switch at “OFF” position and disconnect the battery
ground (-) terminal in order to prevent an unwanted short circuit.
CAUTION:
z When battery terminal is disconnected, all the memories
in the radio and control units will be erased.
GIA0431D_D1
z Do not touch hot components such as radiator, exhaust mani-

fold and muffler to prevent from burning your skin. When en-
gine is hot, do not remove any radiator components such as
the radiator cap until it cools down completely.
z Use designated tools or special tools for safe and effective
service.
z When fuel dispenser nozzle stops automatically while fueling
in the gas station, do not attempt to overfill the fuel tank. If so,
it may lead to fire due to fuel overflow.
GIA0432D_D1
GI-3
PRECAUTIONS
General Precautions (Cont’d)
CORRECT SERVICE
z Operate effectively by fully understanding and diagnosing the
trouble symptom.
z Be sure of the fully assembled components before performing
any disassemble and removal. If need, mark on the part not to
affect normal operating functions.
z When removing oil seals, gaskets, packing, O-rings, locking
washers, cotter pins, self-locking nuts, replace them with new
parts when instructed (when re-use is not allowed).
z Both inner and outer taper roller bearing and needle bearing
should be replaced.
z Place the removed parts in order in which they were removed.
z Clean the removed parts with cleaning solutions or solvents
and then perform inspection or assembly.
z The Renault Samsung genuine parts must be used when re-
placing the components.
z Use designated paper gasket and sealant.
z Release all the remaining pressure inside the pipes and hoses
before removing them.
z When working on the fuel, oil, coolant, exhaust and vacuum
systems, check if any of their system is wet.
VEHICLE PROTECTION
z Use fender covers, seat covers, steering wheel covers and paper
mats to prevent the vehicle from getting dirty.
GIA0011D_D1
Precautions in Wireless System Installation

The installation of business or personal wireless or cellular
phones may cause trouble to electronic control systems ac-
cording to their installed locations. Be sure to check the follow-
ing criteria before performing any installations.
z Place the antenna as far as possible from the ECCS control
unit.
z Place the antenna feeder line no less then 20 cm from the
control unit harness.
z Adjust the antenna and feeder lines so that there is no
jamming.
z Be sure to check the vehicle’s radio ground wire.
GI-4
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
How to Use This Manual
General
This section explains about “removal, disassembly, assembly, installation, inspection, adjustment and
trouble diagnosis”.
Definition of Terms
WARNING: When instructions are not properly followed, death or serious injuries may occur.
CAUTION: When instructions are not properly followed, vehicle damage or personal injuries may occur.
REFERENCE: Useful explanations for easy service.
Standard Value: The permitted range in inspection and adjustment.
Limit Value: The maximum and minimum values never to be exceeded during inspection and adjustment.
Definition of Units
This manual uses N•m (kgf-m) for tightening torque.
“Example”
Tightening Torque:
58.8 - 78.4 N•m (6.0 - 8.0 kgf-m)
Alternative Units
Item SI unit Conventional unit To convert to SI unit
2
Acceleration m/s G 9.80665
Torque, Moment N•m kgf-m 9.80665
Power N kgf 9.80665
MPa kgf/cm 2 0.0980665
Pressure
kPa mmHg 0.133322
Work efficiency, kW PS 0.735499
Power efficiency W kcal/h 1.16279
3
Volume cm cc 1
Spring coefficient N/mm kgf/mm 9.80665
Fuel consumption ratio g/kW•h g/PS•h 1.3596
The conventional unit can be used as SI unit.
Manual Description Order

Precautions: Describes caution details at the beginning of each section.
Preparation: Describes details at the beginning of each section and trouble diagnosis regarding spe-
cial tools and gauges that need to be prepared before work. However, general service
tools are excluded.
Description: All the service instructions, notes, special tools and other service information needed for
each appropriate service is described in.
CAUTION:
z Visual inspection and cleaning of removed parts are not described in this manual since they
are fundamental operations. Be sure to perform these operations.
GI-5
Components Diagram
The components diagram (see illustration) contains informational notes such as installation/removal, tight-
ening torque on disassembly/assembly, lubrication points and parts should not be reused.
SCRL064_D1
Symbols
Symbol Description Symbol Description
The part should be tightened with specified
torque and its tightening torque. When the Always replace after every
specified torque is - N•m ( - kgf-m), disassembly.
the standard torque will be the mean value.
Apply grease.
Unless otherwise indicated, use recom- Apply petroleum jelly.
mended multi-purpose grease.
Lubrication point.
The location where lubricant should be Select with proper thickness.
applied.
Sealing point. Adjustment needed.
Checking point.
SCRL065_D1
GI-6
Trouble Diagnosis
Trouble Diagnosis
CAUTION:
The trouble diagnosis tells the sequence where trouble cause is effectively found. When execut-
ing the trouble diagnosis, refer to the following.
z Read “General Inspection” and “Troubleshooting Table by Symptoms” before executing the
trouble diagnosis.
z After repair, check whether functional defectives are removed.
z Refer to each section’s “Component Location” for location of parts and harness connectors.
z Use circuit diagram for simple inspection. For detailed inspection including sub-harnesses, use
wiring diagram to check the harness layout by identifying the connectors.
z Always place the ignition switch “OFF” when inspecting the circuit.
z Measure the battery voltage before checking the connector voltage.
z After finishing the diagnosis or inspection, check whether all the harness connectors are in
original position.
GI-7
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
1. Sample/Wiring Diagram - EXAMPLE -
GI-8
How to Read Wiring Diagrams (Cont’d)
2. Description
Number Item Description
1 Power condition z This shows the condition when the system receives battery positive
voltage (can be operated).
2 Fusible link z The double line shows that this is a fusible link.
z The open circle shows current flow in, and the shaded circle shows
current flow out.
3 Fusible link/fuse location z This shows the location of the fusible link or fuse in the fusible link or
fuse box.
For arrangement, refer to EL section. (“POWER SUPPLY ROUTING”)
4 Fuse z The single line shows that this is a fuse.
z The open circle shows current flow in, and the shaded circle shows
current flow out.
5 Current rating z This shows the current rating of the fusible link of fuse.
6 Connectors z This shows that connector E3 is female and connector M1 is male.
z The 0.5G/R wire is located in the A1 terminal of both connectors.
z Terminal number with an alphabet (A1 , 5B, etc.) indicates that the
connector is SMJ connector. Refer to Gl-11.
7 System branch z This show that the system branches to another system identified by cell
code. (section and system)
8 Optional Splice z The open circle shows that the splice is optional depending on vehicle
application.
9 Splice z The shaded circle shows that the splice is always on the vehicle.
10 Page crossing z This arrow shows that the circuit continues to an adjacent page.
z The A will match with the A on the preceding or next page.
11 Option abbreviation z This shows that the circuit is optional depending on vehicle application.
12 Switch z This shows that continuity exists between terminals 1 and 2 when the
switch is in the A position. Continuity exists between terminals 1 and 3
when the switch is in the B position.
13 Page crossing z This arrow shows that the circuit continues to an adjacent page.
14 Relay z This shows an internal representation of the relay. For details, refer to
EL section. (“STANDARDIZED RELAY”)
15 Connectors z This shows that the connector is connected to the body or a terminal
with bolt or nut.
16 Component name z This shows the name of a component.
17 Component box in wave z This shows that another part of the component is also shown on
line another page (indicated by wave line) within the system.
18 Assembly parts z Connector terminal in component shows that it is a harness incorpo-
rated assembly.
19 Connector number z This shows the connector number.
z The letter shows which harness the connector is located in.
Example:
M: main harness. For detail and to locate the connector, refer to EL
section.
(“Main Harness”, “HARNESS LAYOUT”)
A coordinate grid is included for complex harnesses to aid in
locating connectors.
GI-9
Number Item Description
20 Wire color z This shows a code for the color of the wire.
B = Black BR = Brown
W = White OR = Orange
R = Red P = Pink
G = Green PU = Purple
L = Blue GY = Gray
Y = Yellow SB = Sky Blue
LG = Light Green CH = Dark Brown
DG = Dark Green
When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, fol-
lowed by the stripe color as shown below:
Example : L/W = Blue with White Stripe
21 Common component z Connectors enclosed in broken line show that these connectors
belong to the same component
22 Common connector z The dotted lines between terminals show that these terminals are
part of the same connector.
23 Current flow arrow z Arrow indicates electric current flow, especially where the direction
of standard flow (vertically downward or horizontally from left to
right) is difficult to follow.
z A double arrow “ ” shows that current can flow in either direction
depending on circuit operation.
24 Option description z This shows a description of the option abbreviation used on the page.
25 Ground (GND) z This shows the ground connection.
26 Connector component z This area shows the connector faces of the components in the wiring
diagram on the page.
27 Fusible link and fuse box z This shows the arrangement of fusible link(s), used for connector
views of “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING” in EL section.
The open square shows current flow in, and the shaded square shows
current flow out.
This is the same meaning as open circle and shaded circle of No. 2 and
No. 4.
28 Reference area z This shows that more information on the Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)
and Joint Connectors (J/C) exists on the foldout page.
29 Shielded line z The line enclosed by broken line circle shows shield wire.
30 Connector color z This shows a code for the color of the connector. For code meaning,
refer to wire color codes, Number 20 of the chart.
31 Ground (GND) z The line spliced and grounded under wire color shows that ground line
is spliced at the grounded connector.
GI-10
2-1. CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from
the terminal side.
z Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed
by a single line and followed by the direction mark ( ).
z Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed
by a double line and followed by the direction mark ( ).
z Male and female terminals

Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and
female terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
GI-11
2-2. SWITCH POSITIONS
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the
“normal” condition
A vehicle is in the “normal” condition when:
z ignition switch is “OFF”,
z doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
z pedals are not depressed, and
z parking brake is released.
2-3. MULTIPLE SWITCH

The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as
shown below.
z The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
z The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
LO
GI-12
2-4. FOLDOUT PAGE
The foldout page should be opened when reading wiring diagram.
2-5. SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)

In wiring diagram, connectors consisting of terminals having terminal numbers with an alphabet(1B,
0D, etc.) are SMJ connectors.
If connector numbers are shown in Reference Area, these connector symbols are not shown in Conector
Area. For terminal arrangement of these connectors, refer to the foldout page at the end of this manual.
2-6. JOINT CONNECTOR

Joint connector symbols are shown in Connector Area in the wiring diagram concerned. Foldout page
also carries inside wiring layout together with such joint connector symbols.
GI-13
HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
1. Work Flow
STEP DESCRIPTION
STEP 1 Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident occurred.
The following are key pieces of information required to make a good analysis:
WHAT Vehicle Model, Engine, Trans Axle and the System, etc. (i.e. Radio)
WHEN Date, Time of Day, Weather conditions, Frequency.
WHERE Road Conditions, Altitude and Traffic Situation.
HOW System Symptoms, Operating Conditions, (Other Components Interaction) Service History and
if any After Market Accessories have been installed.
STEP 2 Operate the system, road test if necessary.
Verify the parameter of the incident.
If the problem can not be duplicated, refer to “Incident Simulation Tests” next page.
STEP 3 Get the proper diagnosis materials together including:
z POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
z System Operation Descriptions
z Applicable Service Manual Sections
z Available Service Bulletin
Identify where to begin diagnosis based upon your knowledge of the system operation and the
customer comments.
STEP 4 Inspect the system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage.
Determine which circuits and components are involved and diagnose using the Power Supply Routing
and Harness Layouts.
STEP 5 Repair or replace the incident circuit or component.
STEP 6 Operate the system in all modes. Verify the system works properly under all conditions. Make sure
you have not inadvertently created a new incident during your diagnosis or repair steps.
GI-14
2. Incident Simulation Tests
2-1. INTRODUCTION
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service If possible, recreate the
conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The
following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experi-
ences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:

z Vehicle Vibration
z Heat sensitive
z Freezing
z Water Intrusion
z Electrical load
z Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of
the problem.
2-2. VEHICLE VIBRATION

The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/
C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below.
2-3. CONNECTORS & HARNESS

Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting.
Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to
duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
2-4. HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connetctor terminals.
A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs
intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and
clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
2-5. SENSORS & RELAYS

Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting.
This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
GI-15
2-6. TESTER PROBE

When probing a connector it is possible to enlarge the contact
spring opening If this occurs it may create an intermittent sig-
nal in the circuit. When probing a connector, use care not to
enlarge the opening. The probe of the Digital Multimeter (DMM)
may not fit into the connector cavity. In such cases make an
extension of a “T” pin and probe it from the harness side of the
connector. Most DMMs have accessory alligator clips. Slide
these over the probe to allow clipping the “T” pin for a better
contact. If you have any difficulty probing a terminal, inspect
the terminal. Ensure you have not accidentally opened the con-
tact spring or pulled a wire loose.
GI-16
2-7. ENGINE COMPARTMENT

There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could
cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for
are:
z Connectors not got near diagnosis probe.
z Connectors not fully seated.
z Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due
to engine vibrations or rocking.
z Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
z Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
z Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the
integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPEC-
TION described later) First check that the system is properly
grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring
or components as previously explained. Using the wiring dia-
grams inspect the wiring for continuity.
2-8. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can be-
come pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration
can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or
near a screw.
2-9. UNDER SEATING AREAS

An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched
by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle
vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire
routing for possible damage or pinching.
2-10. HEAT SENSITIVE

The owner’s problem may occur during hot weather or after car
has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check
for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat
the component with a heat gun or equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60°C (140°F). If incident oc-
curs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate
the component.
GI-17
2-11. FREEZING
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the
car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to wa-
ter freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange
for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get
cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough di-
agnosis of those electrical components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a
freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part
into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it
occurs, repair or replace the component.
2-12. WATER INTRUSION

The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/
snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by
water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by
soaking the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
2-13. ELECTRICAL LOAD

The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagno-
sis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger,
radio, fog lamps) turned on.
2-14. COLD OR HOT START UP

On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when
the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted
hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have
to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
GI-18
3. Circuit Inspection
3-1. INTRODUCTION
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it approached in a logical and organized method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested.
Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit.
SHORT There are two types of shorts.
z SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal
resistance to change.
z SHORTTOGROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit.
3-2. TESTING FOR “OPENS” IN THE CIRCUIT

Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system.
This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce
your working knowledge of the system.
3-3. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD

The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit, The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resis-
tance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit. (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol)
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above.
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable.
2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example)
3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SWI. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an
over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
5. Connect the probes between SWI and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the
circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or
infinite resistance condition. (point B)
6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion
of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example.
GI-19
3-4. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD

To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of
voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
3. With SWI open, probe at SWI to check for voltage.
z voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1.
z no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1. (point A)
4. Close SW1 and probe at relay.
z voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay.
z no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay. (point B)
5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid.
z voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid.
z no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid. (point C)
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example.
3-5. TESTING FOR “SHORT” IN THE CIRCUIT

To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic below.
3-6 RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD

1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe
to a known good ground.
4. With SW1 open, check for continuity.
z continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A)
z no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SWI1.
5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good
ground. Then, check for continuity.
z continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay. (point B)
z no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal
and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity.
z continuity; short is between relay and solenoid. (point C)
z no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
GI-20
3-7. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD

1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verity battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse
terminal (one led on the B + terminal side of the fuse block and on lead on a known good ground).
3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
z voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1. (point A)
z no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals,
check for voltage.
z voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay. (point B)
z no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage.
z voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid.
(point C)
z no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block
3-8. GROUND INSPECTION

Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion
(rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip.
2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
3. Clean as required to assure good contact.
4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
5. Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps, Make sure all
of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
GI-21
3-9. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS

Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this
single stand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the
current. This will be picked up as slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
Undersized wiring (single strand example)
Corrosion on switch contacts
Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
3-10. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD

1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive
lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
2. Operate the circuit.
3. The voltmeter will indicate how manu volts are being used to “push” current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
GI-22
3-11. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP BY STEP

The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage system. (such as
those in “Computer Controlled System”)
Circuit in the “Computer Controlled System” operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance
in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation,
improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
1. Connect the voltmeter as shown, starting at the battery and

working your way around the circut.
2. An unsually large voltage drop will indicate a component or
Switch wire that needs to be repuired. As you can see the illustra-
tion left, the poor connection causes a 4 volt drop.
The chart that follows illustrates some maximum allowable voltage drops.
These values are given as a guideline, the exact value for each component vary.
COMPONENT VOLTAGE DROP

Wire negligible < 0.001 volts
Ground Connections Approx. 0.1 volts
Switch Contacts Approx. 0.3 volts
GI-23
3-12. CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST

System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit lights up the lamp.
Input-output voltage chart

Pin Item Condition Voltage In case of high resistance
No. value [V] such as single strand [V] *
1 Switch Switch Battery Lower than battery voltage
ON voltage Approx. 8 (Example)
OFF Approx. 0 Approx. 0
2 Lamp Switch Battery Approx. 0
ON voltage (Inoperative lamp)
The voltage value is based on the body ground.
Input-output voltage chart

Pin Item Condition Voltage In case of high resistance
No. value [V] such as single strand [V] *
1 Lamp Switch Battery Battery voltage
ON voltage (Inoperative lamp)
OFF Approx. 0 Battery voltage
2 Switch Switch Battery Higher than 0
ON voltage Approx. 4 (Example)
The voltage value is based on the body round.
GI-24
HOW TO FOLLOW FLOW CHART IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures
ECU
GI-25
HARNESS CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Harness Connector Symbols
FEMALE CONNECTORS
z When the harness connector is viewed from the A-direction
(at the terminal), the connector is indicated in single line. Also,
a “T.S.” (Terminal Side) is shown in white as a direction mark.
GIA0005D_D1
z When the harness connector is viewed from the B-direction (at

the harness), the connector is indicated in double lines. Also,
a “H.S.” (Harness Side) is shown in white as a direction mark.
z The terminal arrangement in connector symbol is indicated as
shown from A or B direction. So A-direction has reverse ar-
rangement from B-direction.
GIA0006D_D1
MALE CONNECTORS
z It is the same as the female connector, but the male terminal
connector guide is colored in black for identification.
GIA0007D_D1
ASSEMBLY SUCH AS CONTROL UNIT

z For assemblies such as control units, they have A-direction-
view as illustrated.
GIA0008D_D1
GI-26
ABBREVIATIONS
Abbreviations
Abbreviation Description Abbreviation Description
A/C Air conditioner ILL Illumination
A/T Automatic transaxle INT Intake
ABS Anti-lock brake system L/B Lean-burn
ACC Accessory LH Left
ADS Active damper suspension L.S.V Load sensing valve
ALT Alternator L/U Lock-up
ASCD Auto speed control device LED Light emitting diode
ASSY Assembly LLC Long life coolant
AV Audio-visual LSD Limited slip differential
B C Va l v e Boost control valve M/T Manual transaxle
BAT Battery NAVI Navigation
B P T Va l v e Back pressure transducer valve O/D Overdrive
(back pressure control) OHC Overhead camshaft
C/B Circuit breaker OHV Overhead valve
C/P Crank pulley OS Oversize
C/U Control unit P/S Power steering
CD Compact disc P/W Power window
CVTC Variable valve timing control PBR Potentio balance resistor
Cyl Cylinder PTC Potentio temperature control
DOHC Double overhead camshaft PTO Power take off
DSP Digital signal processor RH Right
ELR Emergency locking retractor RR Rear
ENG Engine S/V Solenoid valve
EXH Exhaust SAS Slow adjusting screw
F/L Fusible link SMJ Super multi junction
FICD Fast idle control device SRS Supplemental restraint system
FPCM Fuel pump control module TAS Throttle adjusting screw
FR Front TCS Traction control system
GPS Global positioning system TCU Time control unit
H/B Hatchback Tr Transistor
H/T Hardtop T V Va l v e Thermal vacuum valve
HEC Hybrid electronic control unit US Undersize
I/P Idle pulley VENT Ventilation
IAA Idle auxiliary air unit VTC Valve timing control
IAS Idle adjust screw V V T Va l v e Ventury vacuum transducer valve
IGN Ignition
GI-27
Connector Terminal Inspection
CONNECTOR INSPECTION
Incorrect circuit connector inspection may cause connector damage or bad connection.
The plug of the voltmeter or so may not be inserted into connector correctly. In that case follow the steps
described below using the clips and T-pins.
INSPECTION FROM HARNESS

For standard connectors, insert the T-pin from the harness side
before inspection.
CAUTION:
z Remove the rear cover before inspection for connectors
with the rear cover as in the ECU.
GIA0435D_D1
INSPECTION FROM TERMINALS

Female terminal
z Every female terminal has a small gap. Insert the T-pin into
the gap and perform inspection.
CAUTION:
z Do not insert any terminals except for the same type male
terminal into the female terminal.
GIA0436D_D1
z Inspect after removing the retainer for female terminals with-

out a gap.
GIA0437D_D1
Male terminal
Inspect by positioning the T-pin at the surface of each male
terminals.
CAUTION:
z Do not bend the terminal.
GIA0438D_D1
GI-28
Electrical System Inspection
GENERAL
z When trouble occurs within the electrical system, inspect for short circuit in fuses and fusible links, and
short/open circuit in connectors.
z If the fuse or the fusible link is shorted, inspect the cause and replace it with a fuse or fusible link with
the specified capacity after replacing it.
z When fuses or fusible links are shorted, examine the cause

and replace with correct capacity fuses and fusible links.
z Do not twist or pull too hard when disconnecting the
connectors.
z Do not pull the harness.
GIA0066D_D1
z For lock-type connectors, first disconnect the lock at the

connector, hold the connectors and disconnect.
z Check if the connector terminals are not bent or broken. Then
firmly connect them.
z For lock-type connectors, connect them by inserting until a
firm lock has engaged.
z Avoid harness protrusion or tangling during assembly.
ECL0005D_D1
Control Unit and Electronic Components

PRECAUTIONS IN HANDLING
z Never inversely connect the battery terminals.
z Do not install any parts other then designated for the vehicle.
z Perform the unit input/output inspection and functional inspec-
tion of the components before replacing the control unit.
z Do not twist or pull too hard when disconnecting the
connectors.
z When disconnecting ECU harness connector, push out the

slider to unlock.
SARE010_D1
GI-29
Electrical System Inspection (Cont’d)
z Check if the connector terminals are not bent or broken. Then
firmly connect them. When connecting ECU harness connector,
push the slider to its end to lock securely. After connecting it,
check for looseness by rocking the connector body.
SARE009_D1
z For lever lock type removal, disconnect the connector by lift-

ing the lever to A-direction as illustrated.
GIA0148D_D1
z For lever lock type installation, place the lever to B-direction

until it clicks in.
GIA0149D_D1
z Do not exert any hard impact to the control unit such as drop-
ping or hitting it.
z Avoid moisture due to sudden temperature change and rain
from the control unit. When this happens, completely dry the
control unit before installing into the vehicle.
z Be careful not to stain oil in the control unit connectors.
z Avoid volatile solvent cleaning for control unit.
z Do not remove the upper and lower cover of the control unit.
GIA0016D_D1
z During circuit testing, be careful not to place the proves too

closely. If the tester probes come in contact each other, it
may cause circuit overheating and may damage the power tran-
sistor inside the control unit due to battery voltage. Allow dis-
tance between the tester probes. Use the designated check
adaptor when checking the input/output signals from the con-
trol unit.
GIA0062D_D1
GI-30
Lifting Point and Towing
JACK/LIFT-UP POINTS
CAUTION:
z Check if the vehicle is empty before lifting.
z Support with transmission jack or others to the rear jack-up points of the vehicle during re-
moval of frontal main components such as engine, transaxle and suspension because it may
change the center of vehicle’s gravity.
GARAGE JACK AND RIGID RACK SUPPORT POINTS
CAUTION:
z Always work in flat surface when using the garage jack.
z When lifting the front (rear) with the jack, support the vehicle with the rigid rack by placing
wood block behind the rear axle (in front of the front axle) and place wood blocks at both rear
wheels (both front wheels).
z Use both jack and rigid rack when working.
z Set the rigid rack with an adaptor to adjust the rigid rack under the jack-up point of the vehicle.
z Never place a rigid rack at the side members on the under floor and at the surface of the floor.
GIA0372D_D1
DOUBLE-POST LIFT SUPPORT POINTS

Put the double-post lift pad at the jack-up point.
BOARD-ON LIFT SUPPORT POINTS

Put the adaptor at the jack-up point when using the board-on lift
adaptor.
CAUTION:
z When the board-on lift cannot be installed at the front
and rear jack-up points, use the lift attachment method
GIA0032D_D1
as illustrated.
GI-31
Lifting Point and Towing (Cont’d)
z The jack-up points of the vehicle should be on the center of
the lift attachments.
GIA0258D_D1
Towing
TOWING HOOK LOCATION
FRONT
Place the rope at the hook located at the front side member.
CAUTION:
z The rope may damage the painted surface of the bumper.
Wrap a cloth around the rope.
GIA0366D_D1
REAR
CAUTION:
z The hook located at the left rear of the side member must
be used in emergency. Do not use it when towing.
GIA0367D_D1
CAUTION:
z Obey all local laws regarding towing.
z Use appropriate towing tools to avoid any damages on
the vehicle during towing.
GI-32
Lifting Point and Towing (Cont’d)
Tow Truck Towing
CAUTION:
z All applicable local laws regarding the towing operation must be obeyed.
z It is necessary to use proper towing equipment to avoid possible damage to the vehicle during
towing operation.
z When towing with the rear wheels on the ground, release the parking brake and move the
gearshift lever to neutral position.
RENAULT SAMSUNG recommends that vehicle be towed with the

driving (front) wheels off the ground as illustrated.
TOWING AN AUTOMATIC TRANS AXLE MODEL WITH FOUR

WHEELS ON GROUND
Observe the following restricted towing speeds and distances.
Speed:
Below 50 km/h (30 MPH)
Distance:
SGI805-E
Less than 65 km (40 miles)
CAUTION:
Never tow an automatic Trans Axle model from the rear (i.e.,
backward) with four wheels on the ground as this may cause
serious and expensive damage to the Trans Axle.
TOWING AN AUTOMATIC TRANS AXLE MODEL WITH REAR

WHEELS RAISED (With front wheels on ground)
Never tow an automatic Trans Axle model with rear wheels raised
SGI806-A-E
(with front wheels on ground) as this may cause serious and ex-
pensive damage to the Trans Axle. If it is necessary to tow it with
rear wheels raised, always use a towing dolly under the front
wheels.
GI-33
Tightening Torque of Standard Bolt
Standard tightening torque
Bolt
Grade Bolt size Pitch Standard bolt Flange bolt
diameter
N•m kg-m N•m kg-m
M6 6.0 1.0 5.1 0.52 6.1 0.62
1.25 13 1.3 15 1.5
M8 8.0
1.0 13 1.3 16 1.6
1.5 25 2.5 29 3.0
4T M10 10.0
1.25 25 2.6 30 3.1
1.75 42 4.3 51 5.2
M12 12.0
1.25 46 4.7 56 5.7
M14 14.0 1.5 74 7.5 88 9.0
M6 6.0 1.0 8.4 0.86 10 1.0
1.25 21 2.1 25 2.5
M8 8.0
1.0 22 2.2 26 2.7
1.5 41 4.2 48 4.9
7T M10 10.0
1.25 43 4.4 51 5.2
1.75 71 7.2 84 8.6
M12 12.0
1.25 77 7.9 92 9.4
M14 14.0 1.5 127 13.0 147 15.0
M6 6.0 1.0 12 1.2 15 1.5
1.25 29 3.0 35 3.6
M8 8.0
1.0 31 3.2 37 3.8
1.5 59 6.0 70 7.1
9T M10 10.0
1.25 62 6.3 74 7.5
1.75 98 10.0 118 12.0
M12 12.0
1.25 108 11.0 137 14.0
M14 14.0 1.5 177 18.0 206 21.0
CAUTION:
z Special parts are excluded.
z Above standards can be applied on the bolts which has following marks on the bolt head.
Grade Mark
4T ......... 4 or no mark
7T ......... 7
9T ......... 9
GI-34
IDENTIFICATION
Vehical Model
Model year Transaxle Vehical model name Class
16AT BDGALVAB10ED1 SPORTY
16MT BDGALVFB10ED1 SPORTY
16AT BDGALFAB10ED1 FAMILY
`05MY 16MT BDGALFFB10ED1 FAMILY
16AT BDGALMAB10ED1 SAFETY
16MT BDGALMFB10ED1 SAFETY
16AT BDGALJAB10ED1 LUXURY
16MT BDGALJFB10ED1 LUXURY
Description for Vehicle Model Name
B DF A L M F B10 E W 1
1: KGN-E
W: Export
E: Gasline
B10: SM3
F: Automatic 5-gear transaxle

A: Automatic 4-gear transaxle
F: FAMILY
J: LUXURY
M: SAFETY
V: SPORTY
L: Left hand drive
A: Front wheel drive
DF: QG 16 Engine
B: 4-door sedan
GI-35
IDENTIFICATION
Vehicle Identification Number
SAIE113_D1
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
K N M A 4 C 2 G M W P OOOOOO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 Country of origin: Korea

2 Make: RENAULT SAMSUNG MOTORS CO., LTD.
3 Vehicle type: M → Passenger car
4 Drive type: A → Left hand drive
B → Right hand drive
5 Body Type: 2 → 2 door
3 → 3 door
4 → 4 door
5 → 5 door
6 Detailed type: A → Compact (Under 800 cc)
B → Small (Under 1500 cc)
C → Medium (From 1500 to 1999 cc)
D → Large (More than 2000 cc)
7 Restraints: 1 → 3-point seatbelt
2 → 3-point seatbelt with airbag
8 Engine type: A → 1800 cc in-line 4 (Gasoline)
B → 2000 cc in-line 4 (Gasoline)
D → 2000 cc V-6 (Gasoline)
E → 2500 cc in-line 4 (Gasoline)
F → 3000 cc V-6 (Gasoline)
G → 1500 cc in-line 4 (Gasoline)
H → 1600 cc in-line 4 (Gasoline)
9 Check digit: “M” for domestic vehicles
10 Model year: X → 1999, Y → 2001, 1 → 2001, 2 → 2002, 3 → 2003, 4 → 2004, 5 → 2005
11 Assembly plant: P → Pusan
12 Vehicle serial number: 000001 - 999999
GI-36
IDENTIFICATION
Vehicle Identification Number (Cont’d)
Label-Certification
SAIE125_D1
1 Year
2 Gross weight
3 Front axle weight when loading
4 Rear axle weight when loading
5 Vehicle identification number
6 Vehicle name
Location
The identification plate is ribetted at
driver side B pillar
SAIE124_D1
GI-37
ENGINE MECHANICAL
SECTION EM
CONTENTS
QG15 QG16
AIR CLEANER • AIR DUCT NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH)

Removal • Installation ................................................ 2 TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting - Engine Noise ................... 13
INTAKE MANIFOLD
Removal • Installation ................................................ 3 AIR CLEANER
Disassembly • Assembly ........................................... 5 Cleaning and Changing ............................................ 15
Throttle Chamber Removal • Installation ............... 5
Throttle Sensor Installation ...................................... 6 SPARK PLUG
Cleaning and Changing ............................................ 16
EXHAUST MANIFOLD • CATALYTIC CONVERTER
Removal • Installation ................................................ 7
Disassembly • Assembly ........................................... 9
SERVICE DATA
Standard Value • Limit Value .................................. 1 0
Tightening Torque ..................................................... 11
[QG15] AIR CLEANER • AIR DUCT
Air Cleaner • Air Duct
Removal • Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air blow meter harness connector.
2. When removing the air cleaner, air duct, resonator, put alignment marks on them if necessary and then
disconnect and remove.
CAUTION:
Carefully handle the air flow meter as follows:
z Do not exert any shock.
z Do not disassemble.
z Do not touch the sensor.
z Do not modify the net.
3. Remove the left fender protector and then remove the resonator inside the fender.
INSTALLATION
1. When installing the air cleaner, air duct and resonator, mate the alignment marks and tighten the clamp
firmly.
2. Install the remaining components in the reverse order of removal.
AIR CLEANER ELEMENT REPLACEMENT

Replacement: Every 20,000 km (12,500 Miles)
EM-2
INTAKE MANIFOLD [QG15]
Intake Manifold
REMOVAL
1. Remove all fuel.
2. Remove the engine cover.
3. Remove the air duct and air cleaner case.
4. Remove the throttle chamber cover.
5. Move the accelerator cable.
6. Remove the fuel hose.
CAUTION:
z Cover with the cap to prevent fuel leakage.
7. Remove the intake manifold support (upper, front and rear).
8. Disconnect and move all harness connectors and pipes.
9. Remove the intake manifold with the following orders.
a. Remove the A/C pipe fixing bolt (at right strut tower), A/C pipe clamp bracket to secure the working
space at the rear engine compartment.
EM-3
[QG15] INTAKE MANIFOLD
b. Remove the bolts and nuts in the reverse order of the

illustration.
c . Remove the intake manifold from the stud bolt at the en-
gine rear. Remove the stud bolt at the engine front by lifting
the rear of the intake manifold.
z Or remove the stud bolt.
CAUTION:
z Be careful not to deform or damage the A/C pipes.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

z Using the straight gage and feeler gage, check if the intake
manifold seating surface is flat.
Limit value: 0.1 mm
INSTALLATION
z Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
z Tighten the bolts and nuts of the intake manifold as in the
illustrated order.
REFERENCE:
z The gasket does not have a direction.
EM-4
INTAKE MANIFOLD [QG15]
Disassembly • Assembly
Throttle Chamber Removal

z Remove the bolts in the reverse order of the illustration for
throttle chamber removal.
Throttle Chamber Installation

z Tighten the bolts in order.
z Tighten using 2 stages.
Tightening torque of stage 1:
8.8 - 10.8 N•m (0.90 - 1.1 kgf-m)
Tightening torque of stage 2:
17.6 - 21.6 N•m (1.8 - 2.2 kgf-m)
CAUTION:
z When replacing the throttle chamber, it performs a fast
TAS learning.
EM-5
[QG15] INTAKE MANIFOLD
Throttle Sensor Installation

z To install the throttle sensor, insert the connector into the
throttle chamber as illustrated and temporarily tighten the screw
after rotating arrow direction.
z Adjust the vehicle operation after installation.
EM-6
EXHAUST MANIFOLD • CATALYTIC CONVERTER [QG15]
Exhaust Manifold • Catalytic Converter
REMOVAL
1. Remove the right under cover.
2. Disconnect the front exhaust tube from the catalytic converter.
3. Remove the exhaust manifold supports from both sides of catalytic converter.
4. Disconnect the oxygen sensor harness connector.
5. Remove the oxygen sensor as follows.
EM-7
[QG15] EXHAUST MANIFOLD • CATALYTIC CONVERTER
z Remove the oxygen sensor using the oxygen sensor wrench.
CAUTION:
z Be careful not to exert any shock.
6. Remove the exhaust manifold cover.

7. Remove the EGR tube.
8. Remove the exhaust manifold and catalytic converter assem-
bly by loosening the nuts as in the reverse order of
illustration.

Using the straight gage and feeler gage, check if the exhaust
manifold seating surface is flat.
Limit value: 0.3 mm
INSTALLATION
EM-8
EXHAUST MANIFOLD • CATALYTIC CONVERTER [QG15]
z Tighten the nuts of the exhaust manifold and catalytic con-

verter assembly as in the order of illustration.
z Install exhaust manifold supports by applying Renault Samsung
genuine liquid gasket to the mating surface of the engine.
Catalytic Converter Cover Installation

z Identify the left/right bolts (A) with center bolt (B) before in-
stallation since they are two different bolt types.
EM-9
[QG15] SERVICE DATA
Service Data
Standard Value • Limit Value
Firing order 1-3-4-2
Engine model QG15DE
Compression pressure Standard value 1.37 (14.0)/350
(MPa (kgf/cm 2) / rpm) Limit value 1.18 (12.0)/350
Difference limit between cylinders 0.1 (1.0)/350
Intake manifold 0.1
Exhaust manifold 0.3
Flatness limit (mm)
Cylinder Head 0.1
Cylinder Block 0.1
Flywheel wear limit (mm) 0.15
Spark plug gap (mm) 1.0 - 1.1
+0.03
Intake 0.37
-0.05
Valve clearance (When warm)(mm)
+0.05
Exhaust 0.40
-0.03
Belt deflection (mm)

Belt tension [N (kg)]
[When pressed with the force of
[With tensiometer] 98.1 N (10 kg)]
Item Belt type
After After
New Tension limit New Tension limit
adjustment adjustment
Power steering pump, 446 - 553 348 - 436 137 6.7 - 7.7 7.7 - 8.6 12.9
V-belt (3 grooves)
water pump (45.5 - 54.5) (35.5 - 44.5) (14) (4.6 - 5.2) (5.2 - 5.8) (8.5)
Alternator, air condi- 789 - 877 652 - 740 292
V-belt (6 grooves) 4.5 - 5.0 5.3 - 5.7 8.1
tioner compressor (80.5 - 89.5) (66.5 - 75.5) (30)
EM-10
SERVICE DATA [QG15]
Tightening Torque
*: Components with tightening order.
1)~: Should be tightened in several stages.
Unit: N•m (kgf-m)
Air blow meter 8.8 - 10.8 (0.86 - 1.1)
* Pressure regulator 2.9 - 3.8 (0.30 - 0.39)
Fuel tube • Injector assembly 1) 11.8 - 13.7 (1.2 - 1.4)
2) 16.7 - 23.5 (1.7 - 2.4)
Fuel sub-tube 6.9 - 9.5 (0.70 - 0.97)
* Intake manifold 16.7 - 23.5 (1.7 - 2.4)
* Intake manifold collector 7.0 - 9.5 (0.71 - 0.97)
Intake manifold support (M8 bolt) 16.7 - 23.5 (1.7 - 2.4)

Intake manifold support (M10 bolt) 33.3 - 46.1 (3.4 - 4.7)
* Throttle chamber 1) 8.8 - 10.8 (0.9 - 11)

2) 17.7 - 21.6 (1.8 - 2.2)
AAC valve 3.0 - 4.0 (0.31 - 0.41)
Throttle position sensor 2.0 - 2.6 (0.20 - 0.27)
Evap canister purge volume control solenoid valve 6.92 - 9.51 (0.7 - 0.97)
Exhaust manifold 25.5 - 29.4 (2.6 - 3.0)
O2 sensor 40.2 - 59.8 (4.1 - 6.1)
Ground nut 79.4 (8.1)
Catalytic converter (under the manifold) 29.4 - 34.3 (3.0 - 3.5)
Catalytic converter support
(Cylinder block side) 33.3 - 46.1 (3.4 - 4.7)
(Catalytic converter) 29.4 - 34.3 (3.0 - 3.5)
Catalytic converter cover 6.3 - 8.3 (0.64 - 0.85)
Ignition coil 3.7 - 5.0 (0.38 - 0.51)
* Rocker cover 6.9 - 9.5 (0.70 - 0.97)
* Oil pan 6.3 - 8.3 (0.64 - 0.85)
Oil pan drain plug 29.4 - 39.2 (3.0 - 4.0)
Oil strainer 6.3 - 8.3 (0.64 - 0.85)
Cylinder head front cover 7.0 - 9.5 (0.71 - 0.97)
PHASE sensor 7.2 - 10.8 (0.73 - 1.1)
Chain tensioner 6.3 - 8.3 (0.64 - 0.85)
Camshaft sprocket
(Intake side) 98.1 - 127 (10.0 - 13.0)
(Exhaust side) 98.1 - 127 (10.0 - 13.0)
EM-11
[QG15] SERVICE DATA
* Camshaft bracket 1) 2.0 (0.20)

2) 5.9 (0.60)
3) 9.0 - 11.8 (0.92 - 1.2)
Crankshaft pulley 132.4 - 152.0 (13.5 - 15.5)
Front cover (M6 bolt) 7.0 - 9.5 (0.71 - 0.97)
(M8 bolt) 16.7 - 23.5 (1.7 - 2.4)
Chain guide 6.3 - 8.3 (0.64 - 0.85)
Chain tension guide 15.7 - 20.6 (1.6 - 2.1)
* Cylinder head bolt 1) 29.4 (3.0)
2) 58.8 (6.0)
3) 0 (0)
4) 29.4 (3.0)
5) 50 - 55° (Angular tightening)
* Cylinder head auxiliary bolt 6.3 - 8.3 (0.64 - 0.85)
Spark plug 19.6 - 29.4 (2.0 - 3.0)
Thermal transmitter 19.6 - 26.5 (2.0 - 2.7)
Coolant temperature sensor 19.6 - 29.4 (2.0 - 3.0)
* Main bearing cap 46.1 - 52.0 (4.7 - 5.3)
Connecting rod nut 1) 13.7 - 15.7(1.4 - 1.6)
2) 35 - 40° (Angular tightening)
Rear oil seal retainer 6.3 - 8.3 (0.64 - 0.85)
Flywheel (for manual transaxle) 83.4 - 93.2 (8.5 - 9.5)
Drive plate (for automatic transaxle) 93.2 - 103 (9.5 - 10.5)
Signal plate 7.6 - 9.2 (0.78 - 0.94)
POS sensor 7.2 - 10.8 (0.73 - 1.1)
Knock sensor 20.6 - 26.5 (2.1 - 2.7)
EM-12
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING [QG16]
NVH Troubleshooting - Engine Noise
EM-13
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
[QG16] TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting - Engine Noise (Cont’d)
NVH Troubleshooting - Engine Noise
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom.
1. Locate the area where noise occurs.
2. Confirm the type of noise.
3. Specify the operating condition of engine.
4. Check specified noise source.
If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
Operating condition of engine

Location of Type of Source of Reference
Before After When When When While Check item
noise noise noise page
warmup warmup starting idling racing driving
Top of Engine, Ticking or C A A B Tappet noise Valve clearance EM-52
- -
Rocker Cover, click
Cylinder Head Rattle C A A B C Camshaft Camshaft journal clearance, EM-44
-
bearing noise Camshaft runout
Crankshaft Slap or A B B Piston pin Piston and piston pin EM-65, 70
Pulley, Cylinder knock - - - noise clearance, Connecting rod
block (Side of bushing clearance
Engine), Oil pan Slap or A B B A Piston slap Piston-to-bore clearance, Pis- EM-65, 66
rap noise ton ring side clearance,
- -
Piston ring end gap, Connect-
ing rod bend and torsion
Knock A B C B B B Connecting Connecting rod bearing EM-69
rod-bearing clearance (Big end),
noise Connecting rod bushing
clearance (Small end)
Knock A B A B C Main bearing Main bearing oil clearance, EM-68
-
noise Crankshaft runout
Front of Engine, Tapping or A A B B B Timing chain Timing chain cracks and EM-29
Timing Chain ticking - and chain wear, Timing chain
Cover tensioner noise tensioner operation
Front of Engine Squeak or A B B C Drive belts Drive belts deflection EM-15
fizzing - - (sticking or
slipping)
Creaking A B A B A B Drive belts Idler pulley bearing operation
(slipping)
Squall or A B B A B Water pump Water pump operation SM3, LC
-
creak noise
A: Closely related B: Related C: Sometimes related —: Not related
EM-14
AIR CLEANER [QG16]
Cleaning and Changing
VISCOUS PAPER TYPE
The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between
renewals. Its renewal interval is every 5,000 km of driving.
EM-15
[QG16] SPARK PLUG
1. Disconnect ignition coil harness connectors.
2. Remove ignition coils.
3. Remove spark plugs with spark plug wrench.

4. Clean plugs in sand blast cleaner.
5. Check insulator for cracks or chips, gasket for damage or
deterioration and electrode for wear and burning. If they are
excessively worn away, replace with new spark plugs.
Wrench with a magnet to hold spark plug
6. Check spark plug gap.

Spark plug:
NGK
Standard LFR5A-11
Type Hot LFR5A-11
Cold LFR6A-11
Plug gap mm (in) 1.0 - 1.1 (0.039 - 0.043)
z Use standard type spark plug for normal condition.

The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling may occur
with the standard type spark plug such as:
a) frequent engine starts
b) low ambient temperatures
z The cold type spark plug is suitable when spark knock may
occur with the standard type spark plug such as:
c) extended highway driving
d) frequent high engine revolution
7. Install spark plugs.
Spark plug:
19.6 - 29.4 N·m (2.0 - 2.9 kg-m, 15 - 21 ft-lb)
8. Install ignition coils.
9. Connect ignition coil harness connectors.
EM-16
ENGINE LUBRICATION AND COOLING SYSTEMS
SECTION LC
CONTENTS
QG15
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

Coolant Inspection ..................................................... 2
Replacement Interval .................................................. 2
Coolant Change ........................................................... 2
Radiator Removal • Installation ............................... 5
Radiator Fan Disassembly • Assembly ................. 6
Radiator Cap Inspection ............................................ 6
Radiator Inspection .................................................... 7
SERVICE DATA
Engine Lubrication System Standard Value •
Limit Value .................................................................... 8
Tightening Torque ....................................................... 8
Engine Cooling System Standard Value •
Limit Value .................................................................... 9
[QG15] ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Coolant
Inspection
COOLANT LEVEL CHECK
z Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is
cold. The level should be between MIN and MAX marks.
z If the level is low, add coolant.
COOLANT LEAK INSPECTION

z When pressure was applied to the cooling system with the
radiator cap tester, check if there are any coolant leakages.
Applying pressure limit: 0.1 MPa (1.0 kgf/cm 2 )
CAUTION:
z Perform the inspection while the engine is cold.
z Use a hose adaptor between the radiator cap tester and
radiator cap to prevent radiator filler from deforming.
z Always obey the applying pressure limit to prevent the
radiator from damaging.
z If any defectives are found, repair or replace the relevant
components.
Replacement Interval
5 years or 100,000 km initially.
Every 3 years or 60,000 km after initial change.
Leakage inspection: Daily.
Coolant Change
COOLANT DRAIN
CAUTION:
z Perform the drain when the coolant is cooled down.
1. Remove the under cover.

2. Release the radiator drain cock, remove the radiator cap and
drain the coolant.
LC-2
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM [QG15]
3. Drain the coolant inside the cylinder block after removing the
cylinder block drain plug.
4. Drain the coolant after removing the coolant reservoir.
REFILLING
z Coolant capacity [Including MAX level of coolant reservoir].
Manual transaxle: Approx. 6.7 liters
Automatic transaxle: Approx. 6.6 liters
z LLC concentration
General area: 40 %
Freezing area: 50 %
1. Install the coolant reservoir.
2. Install the radiator drain cock and cylinder block drain plug.
z Apply sealant (genuine liquid gasket) on the threads of cyl-
inder block drain plug.
Tightening torque:
34.3 - 44.1 N•m (3.5 - 4.5 kgf-m)
3. Check if all hose clamps and drain plugs were tightened
correctly.
4. Remove the air bleeding plug.
5. Refill the coolant up to the filler neck with 2-liter/min. of rate.
CAUTION:
z Fill the coolant in slowly because fast filling may cause
air bubbles in the coolant.
z If coolant overflows from the air bleeding plug, tighten the plug
and fill in the coolant again.
z Replace the air bleeding plug washer.
Tightening torque:
6.7 - 7.9 N•m (0.68 - 0.81 kgf-m)
6. Fill the coolant until it reaches to the “MAX” mark on the
reservoir.
7. Close the radiator cap and start the engine.
8. Warm up the engine until the thermostat is open. Run the en-
gine approx. for 10 minutes with 3,000 RPM.
CAUTION:
z Be careful not to warm the coolant too high.
z When the radiator lower hose is warm, the thermostat is

opened.
LC-3
9. Stop the engine.

10. After cooling the engine (below 50°C), remove the radiator cap and check the coolant level.
If the level is lowed, fill the coolant to the filler neck. Then repeat the steps from number 7.
11. If the level does not go down, fill the coolant to the reservoir up to “MAX” mark.
COOLANT FLOWING SOUND CHECK

1. Let the engine cool off (below 50°C).
CAUTION:
z Close all windows, doors and hood. Turn off radio.
2. Start the engine and keep the engine speed to 1,000 RPM for about 30 seconds, and then increase
the engine speed from 1,000 to 3,000 RPM (1 cycle). Repeat for 3 cycles.
3. When performing above No. 2 step, check if any coolant flowing sound is heard from the heater core.
4. If you hear any sound from the heater core, repeat the steps from No. 4 in “Refilling” to No. 3 in “Coolant
Flowing Sound Check”.
LC-4
Radiator
WARNING:
z Never open the radiator cap when engine is hot. You may get severely burnt by the high-pres-
sure coolant coming out from the radiator.
CAUTION:
z Drain the coolant when the engine is cooled down.
REMOVAL
1. Remove the under cover (splash cover assembly).
2. Drain the coolant.
WARNING:
z Never open the radiator cap when engine is hot. You may get severely burnt by the high-pres-
sure coolant coming out from the radiator.
3. Disconnect the fan motor harness connector.
4. Move the battery right relay case.
5. Removing the automatic transaxle oil cooler hose. Cover the hose with a cap to prevent the A/T fluid
leakage.
6. Remove the radiator hose (upper and lower) mount bracket.
7. Remove the radiator and radiator fan assembly and then separate them.
CAUTION:
z Be careful not to damage the radiator core.
INSTALLATION
LC-5
Radiator Fan Disassembly • Assembly
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove the fan.
2. Remove the fan motor from the fan shroud.
ASSEMBLY
z Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
z During fan assembly, apply sealant (3-BOND THREAD LOCK SUPER 1303B) to the threads on the fan
motor shaft and tighten the nut.
Radiator Cap Inspection

z Inspect for any contaminations or damages at the radiator cap’s
valve seat.
z By moving the vacuum pressure valve, check for its normal
operations.
LC-6
z After connecting the radiator cap tester, check the opening

pressure of the vacuum pressure valve by pressurizing the
tester.
Standard value:
0.06 - 0.1 MPa (0.6 - 1.0 kgf/cm 2 )
z Apply water or LLC (coolant) on the radiator cap seal when
connecting the radiator cap to the tester.
z When vacuum pressure valve is damaged or the valve opening
pressure is off the standard value, replace the radiator cap.
Radiator Inspection
Inspect for presence of any dirt or clogging and remove as follows.
z Be careful not to bend or damage the radiator pin.
z When cleaning the radiator while installed, remove the surrounding components such as the radiator fan
assembly and horn and cover the harness and connectors with a tape not to wet.
1. Pour water perpendicularly from the rear side of the radiator.
z Do not pour on one or two points. Perform cleaning thoroughly in various points.
2. Clean until all contaminations are completely removed from the radiator.
3. Blow the radiator with compressed air perpendicularly from the rear.
z The pressure of the compressed air should be less than 490 kPa (5 kgf/cm2) and away from the radiator at
least 30 cm.
z Do not blow on one or two points. Perform blowing thoroughly in various points.
LC-7
[QG15] SERVICE DATA
Engine Lubrication System
Engine oil pressure When idling Approx. more than 0.07 (0.7)
MPa (kgf/cm2) 2,000 rpm Approx. more than 0.28 (2.9)
*Oil temperature at 80°C. 6,000 rpm Approx. more than 0.42 (4.3)
Engine oil change (with SG, SH or SF grades) Every 10,000 km or 1-year
H level 2.7
L level 2.0
Engine oil capacity (L) Without oil filter Approx. 2.5
With oil filter Approx. 2.7
Whole capacity (factory capacity) 3.1
Oil filter replacement Every 10,000 km or 1-year
Oil pump clearances (mm)
Between the outer rotor and front cover 0.114 - 0.200
Between the inner rotor and outer rotor tip Less than 0.180
Between the inner rotor and front cover 0.030 - 0.070
Between the outer rotor and front cover 0.030 - 0.090
Between the inner rotor and front cover inner 0.045 - 0.091
Regulator valve 0.040 - 0.097
Tightening Torque
Unit: N•m (kgf-m)
Oil pressure switch 12.3 - 17.2 (1.25 - 1.75)
Oil pump cover 5.9 - 7.8 (0.60 - 0.80)
Oil strainer 6.3 - 8.3 (0.60 - 0.85)
Regulator 39.2 - 58.8 (4.0 - 6.0)
LC-8
SERVICE DATA [QG15]
Engine Cooling System
Coolant capacity [Including reservoir with MAX level] (L) Manual transaxle: Approx. 6.7
Automatic transaxle: Approx. 6.6
Leakage test pressure (kgf/cm 2) 1.0
Coolant change 5-year or 100,000 km initially.
Every 3-year or 60,000 km afterwards.
LLC (coolant) concentration (%) General area 40
Freezing area 50
Radiator cap relief pressure (kgf/cm 2) 0.9
Thermostat valve opening temperature [start to open - open] (°C) 82 - 95
Tightening Torque
Unit: N•m (kgf-m)
Cylinder block drain plug 34.3 - 44.1 (3.5 - 4.5)
Air bleeding plug 6.7 - 7.9 (0.68 - 0.81)
Radiator mount bracket 3.8 - 4.5 (0.39 - 0.46)
Radiator fan assembly 3.8 - 4.5 (0.39 - 0.46)
Fan 2.9 - 3.9 (0.30 - 0.40)
Fan motor 3.9 - 4.9 (0.40 - 0.50)
Water pump 16.7 - 23.5 (1.7 - 2.4)
Water pump pulley 6.3 - 8.3 (0.64 - 0.85)
Water inlet 6.3 - 9.3 (0.64 - 0.85)
Thermostat housing 16.7 - 23.5 (1.7 - 2.4)
LC-9
ACCELERATOR CONTROL, FUEL AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS
SECTION FE
CONTENTS
QG16
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Inspection ..................................................................... 2
Exhaust Front Tube to Three Way Catalyst
(Exhaust Manifold) ..................................................... 4
Inspection after Installation ...................................... 4
SERVICE DATA
Accelerator Control System ..................................... 5
Fuel Tank ...................................................................... 5
Exhaust System ......................................................... 5
[QG16] EXHAUST SYSTEM
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspection
Check the exhaut pipe, muffler and mounting for improper
installation, gas leak, crack, damage, rattle or contamination.
WARNING:
z Replace gasket to a new one when reassembling the ex-
haust system.
z Check exhaust system for improper attachment such as
exhaust gas leaks and noise while the engine is running..
z Make sure that the mounting bracket and the mounting
insulator are installed properly and there is no excessive
stress. It can result in noise and vibration.
z Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been
dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
z Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys-
tem threads using oxygen sensor thread cleaner and ap-
proved anti-seize lubricant.
z Do not tighten the heated oxygen sensor excessively. It
can damage the heated oxygen sensor resulting in warn-
ing light blinking.
z Be sure to use genuine exhaust system parts or equiva-
lents which are specially designed for heat resistance,
corrosion resistance, and shape.
z Do not work on the exhaust system right after engine stops
since it is still hot.
z Be careful not to hurt by the heat resistant material.
FE-2
EXHAUST SYSTEM [QG16]
1 Heat insulator 6 Gasket 11 Heat insulator

2 Ground wire 7 Heat insulator 12 Seal bearing
3 Mounting rubber 8 Free muffler 13 Spring
4 Main muffler 9 Exhaust front tube 14 Heat insulator
5 Mounting rubber 10 Mounting rubber
FE-3
[QG16] EXHAUST SYSTEM
Removal
z Remove the joints and mountings on exhaust system.
Installation
Install in the reverse order of removal with following cares.
z Remove old gasket on mating surface of connections.
z When installing the exhaust pipe assembly, temporarily tighten
the mounting nut (vehicle side) and the bolt on the exhaust
manifold. Make sure that there is not tensile force on each
part and then tighten nuts and bolts to the specified torque.
z Do not apply excessive tensile force on the mounting rubber
or do not twist it when installing it.
z Install the seal bearing unit according to the following
procedures.
Exhaust Front Tube to Three Way Catalyst

(Exhaust Manifold)
1. Insert the seal bearing to the three way catalyst to the direc-
tion as shown in the figure.
WARNING:
z Be careful not to damage the seal bearing surface when
installing.
2. Tighten the bolt while the spring side with bigger diameter faces
the flange.
z Tighten the mounting bolt and make sure no part interferes
with the bolt.
Inspection after Installation

Check if there is exhaust gas leak and noise from the exhaust
tube joint while engine is running.
FE-4
SERVICE DATA [QG16]
Service Data
Accelerator Control System
Unit: N•m (kgf-m)
Accelerator pedal bracket 4.3 ~ 5.9 (0.44 ~ 0.6)

Dynamic Damper 4.4 ~ 5.9 (0.45 ~ 0.6)
Fuel Tank
Fuel tank capacity (L) 55
Tightening Torque
Unit: N•m (kgf-m)
Fuel pump module 6 ~ 7 (58.8 ~ 68.6)

Fuel tank mounting band 3.8 ~ 5.0 (37 ~ 49)
Filler tube 1.3 ~ 3.7 (0.13 ~ 0.38)
Fuel tank protector 2 ~ 2.9 (0.2 ~ 0.3)
Exhaust System
Unit: N•m (kgf-m)
Exhaust system
Catalytic converter in manifole~ 43.1 ~ 54.9 (4.4 ~ 5.6)
Exhaust sub muffler ~ Assembly
Exhaust sub muffler assembly ~ Main muffler 33.3 ~ 43.1 (3.4 ~ 4.4)
Exhaust muffler assembly ~ Heated oxygen sensor 34.3 ~ 44.1 (3.5 ~ 4.5)
FE-5
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SECTION RS
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS AND PREPARATION
Precautions .................................................................. 2
Special Service Tools ................................................ 3
SRS (SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM) AIRBAG

General ......................................................................... 4
SRS Components Locations .................................... 5
Removal • Installation - Diagnosis Sensor
Unit and Side Sensor ................................................. 7
Removal • Installation - Airbag Module and
Spiral Cable ................................................................. 8
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SRS AIRBAG

Circuit Diagram ......................................................... 1 3
Wiring Diagram ......................................................... 1 4
Self-Diagnosis .......................................................... 1 6
Diagnosis Using Mr.Tech ........................................ 1 7
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
Front Collision ........................................................... 2 0
Side Collision ............................................................ 2 1
Instrument Panel Inspection .................................. 2 2
Precautions
CAUTION:
z To install/remove the SRS airbag, pretensioner seatbelt sys-
tem related components and harness, turn the ignition switch
“OFF”, disconnect the battery terminals and wait over 3
minutes. (This is to discharge all the remaining electricity in
the airbag sensor unit’s auxiliary power circuit.)
z Do not use air impact or electrical tools when installing/re-
moving the components.
z Do not use any hand-held tools for harness used in SRS airbag
and pretensioner seatbelt systems. Be careful with the har-
ness not to tangle with or interfere with other components.
z Do not use any electrical test equipments such as circuit tester
when inspecting the SRS airbag and pretensioner seatbelt cir-
cuit while installed unless the Service Manual instructs to do
so. (The weak current in the tester can cause the SRS airbag
to operate.)
z Do not insert any foreign materials such as a screwdriver in
the airbag module and pretensioner seatbelt connector in or-
der to prevent unintended operation due to static electricity.
z The harnesses used in SRS airbag and pretensioner are cov-
ered with yellow insulation for easy identification.
z Refer to “RS Restraint System” in this Service Manual for safe
airbag system service information.
z When storing the airbag module as a component, position the pad
surface upwards for the driver’s airbag, outer surface upwards for the
passenger’s airbag and stud bolts downwards by standing for the
side airbags. (This is to be prepared for the unintended inflation.)
z Do not store the airbag module in the area where the temperature is
over 90°C and pretensioner seatbelt in the area where over 80°C.
z Do not drop or shock the airbag module and pretensioner seatbelt.
Replace if shocked.
z Be careful not to stain any oil, grease, solvents or water at airbag
module and pretensioner seatbelt.
z Refer to “Airbag Module and Pretensioner Seatbelt Disposal” in “SRS
Airbag” for safe disposal.
z After replacing or removing/installing the pretensioner seatbelt or af-
ter reconnecting the pertensioner seatbelt sensor connector, check
for the normal operation of the system using the airbag warning light.
Refer to “Trouble Diagnosis” in “SRS Airbag”.
z Do not reuse the buckle and seatbelt assembly if the pretensioner
seatbelt has operated.
z Replace the seatbelt assembly when the waving is cut, loose or
damaged.
z When replacing the seatbelt assembly, use Renault Samsung genu-
ine components.
z Do not use any electrical test equipments such as circuit tester
when inspecting the airbag sensor unit, airbag module, pretensioner
seatbelt, related harness or components while on-vehicle service.
(The weak current in the tester can cause the SRS airbag to operate.)
z Do not insert any foreign materials such as a screwdriver in the airbag
module and pretensioner seatbelt connector (to prevent unintended
operation due to static electricity).
z Check the system by using airbag warning light or Mr. Tech. Do not
use any electrical testers such as circuit tester.
RS-2
Preparation
Special Service Tools
Item Description
09839-51010 Fixing the airbag module

Airbag module fixing
bracket
09839-51020 Deploying the airbag module

Deployment tool
09839-41010 Connecting deployment tool with passenger

Converting connector airbag module
09839-51060 Connecting deployment tool with pretensioner

Converting connector seatbelt
09839-41020 Connecting deployment tool with side airbag

Converting connector module
Mr. Tech Diagnosing/testing electronic systems
RS-3
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Airbag
General
The airbag deploys when the diagnosis sensor unit determines as collision when the ignition switch is in
ON or START.
The collision mode for SRS activation varies slightly depending on SRS systems.
For example, the driver and passenger airbags deploy only under head-on collision and do not work for side
impacts.
The SRS reaction for collision is as chart below.
SRS type Front collision Left side collision Right side collision
Driver airbag module O - -
Passenger airbag module O - -
Side airbag module (Left) - O -
Side airbag module (Right) - - O
Pretensioner seatbelt O
RS-4
SRS Components Locations
Inspection Items
1. Check the airbag warning light operation. The airbag warning
light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to ON.
The warning light goes out after 3 to 5 seconds if the airbag
system is normal. However, if the airbag warning light works
as below, inspect the airbag system immediately (Refer to RS-
33 for details).
z The warning light does not come on when the ignition switch
is turned to ON.
z The warning light does not go out after 3 to 5 seconds after
coming on.
z The warning light goes out after 3 to 5 seconds after com-
ing on but comes on again.
z The warning light comes on while driving.
2. Visually inspect the SRS components.

(1) Diagnosis Sensor Unit
z Check the diagnosis sensor unit and bracket for damage,
cracks or deformations.
z Check the connector for damage and terminal for
deformation.
RS-5
(2) Airbag Module and Steering Wheel

z Remove the airbag module from the instrument panel and
inspect for any damages in harness cover and connector
and any deformation or hardenings in the terminals.
z Install the driver airbag module in the steering wheel and
inspect for firm seating and alignment with the steering
wheel.
z Inspect for whether there are excessive gap with steering
wheel.
z Install the passenger airbag module in the instrument panel
and inspect for firm seating and alignment with the instru-
ment penal.
z Install the side airbags in the seatbacks and inspect for
firm seating and alignment with the seats.
(3) Spiral Cable

z Inspect for any damage, cracks or deformation at the spiral
cable.
z Inspect for any damages in the connector and insulation
tape.
z Inspect the steering wheel for noise, hardening and hard
steering.
(4) Main Harness and Airbag Harness

z Inspect the connector for firm connection and damage and
terminals for deformation.
z Inspect for any hardening, peel or open circuit in the
harness.
CAUTION:
z Be sure to replace the special bolt and ground bolt with
new.
RS-6
Removal • Installation - Diagnosis Sensor Unit and Side Sensor
CAUTION:
z Before performing any SRS service, turn the ignition OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and
then wait for more than 3 minutes.
z The special nut is coated with the bonding agent and the ground nut is also specially treated.
Always replace them with new if removed.
z Inspect if the diagnosis sensor unit and the side sensor are correctly installed.
z Inspect the diagnosis sensor unit and the side sensor for any deformation, cracks, holes, or rust.
If the damage can be identified visually, replace the damaged component with new.
z Inspect the diagnosis sensor unit and side sensor brackets for any deformation or rust.
z After replacing the diagnosis sensor unit and side sensor, perform the SRS function test and self-
diagnosis with Mr. Tech.
z Never disassemble the diagnosis sensor unit and the side sensor.
z When the diagnosis sensor unit is dropped or shocked, replace the unit.
Removal of Diagnosis Sensor Unit

1. Disconnect the driver, passenger and side airbag module
connectors.
2. Remove the console box. Refer to “Instrument Panel” in “BT”
section.
3. Disconnect the diagnosis sensor unit connector. Flip the lock
lever towards arrow direction.
4. Remove the diagnosis sensor unit after removing the special
nut.
CAUTION:
z Installation is in the reverse order of removal. However,
tighten the diagnosis sensor unit as below.
1 → 2 → 3 → 1
Temporary Complete Complete Complete
tightening tightening tightening tightening
RS-7
Removal • Installation - Airbag Module and Spiral Cable
Removal - Airbag Module and Spiral Cable

CAUTION:
z Before performing any SRS service, turn the ignition OFF,
disconnect both battery terminals and then wait for more
than 3 minutes.
z Always work sideways from the airbag module.
1. Remove the airbag module by inserting a flat-bladed (-) screw-

driver inside the steering wheel lower hole and pushing the
airbag module fixing spring up.
2. Remove the airbag module connector as shown in the illustra-
tion by wrapping the screwdriver with insulation tape.
CAUTION:
z Always store the airbag module so that its pad faces
upwards.
z Never disassembly the airbag module.
RS-8
z Do not drop or shock the airbag module. Replace the mod-

ule if deformed or cracked.
z Do not store the airbag module to where the temperature
is over 90°C.
z Be careful not to stain the airbag module with oil, grease
or water.
3. While the steering wheel is in neutral, disconnect the horn

connector and remove the nuts.
4. Remove the steering wheel using a steering wheel puller (09462-
51010). Do not over-tighten the puller bolt in the steering wheel.
CAUTION:
z Do not tap the steering wheel or hit against other objects.
5. Remove the steering column cover.

6. Disconnect the connector and remove 4 screws to remove the
spiral cable.
CAUTION:
z Do not disassembly the spiral cable or stain it with any
lubricants.
Removal - Passenger Airbag Module

CAUTION:
than 3 minutes.
1. Open the glove box lid.

2. Disconnect the inflator connector from the airbag connector in
the body side.
3. Remove the glove box assembly. (Refer to “Instrument Panel”
in section “BT”.)
4. Remove the bolts and special bolts from passenger airbag mod-
ule using a temper resistant torx (size 50) and take out the
airbag module from the instrument panel.
z Use both hands when removing the airbag module. It is
heavy.
CAUTION:
z Always keep the airbag module so that its pad surface
faces upwards.
z Never disassemble the airbag module.
z The special bolt is coated with the bonding agent. Al-
ways replace it with new if removed.
z Be careful not to insert any foreign materials such as a
screwdriver into the airbag module connector.
z Do not use a circuit tester to inspect the airbag module
harness connector.
RS-9

is over 90°C.
or water.
Removal - Side Airbag Module

CAUTION:
than 3 minutes.
z Always work behind the airbag module.
1. Remove the seat mounting bolts. Refer to “Seat” in BT.

2. Remove the side airbag module connector.
3. Remove the seatback assembly.
CAUTION:
z The side airbag module is built in the seatback. Replace
the seatback when replacing the airbag module after
deployment.
z Keep the airbag module so that its pad surface faces
upwards.
z Never disassemble the airbag module.
z Always replace the special nuts with new if removal.
z Be careful not to insert any foreign materials such as a
screwdriver into the airbag module connector.
is over 90°C.
or water.
RS-10
Spiral Cable
REMOVAL
1. Set the steering wheel to neutral position.
2. Remove the horn switch connector.
3. Pull out the steering wheel.
CAUTION:
z Do not tap the steering wheel or hit against other objects.
4. Remove the steering column cover.

5. Remove the spiral cable by disconnecting the spiral cable con-
nector and removing the 4 screws. Disconnect the spiral cable
connector by pulling its lock and depressing the end.
CAUTION:
z Do not disassemble the spiral cable.
z Do not apply oil to the spiral cable.
INSTALLATION
1. Set the front wheels straight-ahead position. Let the R mark
on the spiral cable downwards and then install the steering
wheel by aligning the 3 boss holes on the rear with 3 bosses
on the spiral cable.
2. Check that the spiral cable is in neutral position.
CAUTION:
z The spiral cable can be snapped while steering if it is
not in correct positions.
RS-11
z To set the neutral position, rotate the spiral cable clock-

wise until it stops. Then rotate counterclockwise (about
3.5 turns) until the adjust mark aligns with centering mark.
(The spare parts are set to the neutral position with
stopper. Install as it is by removing the stopper.)
z Do not rotate the spiral cable unnecessarily. And do not
try to excessively rotate the spiral cable if it stopped (The
cable can be snapped).
3. Connect the spiral cable connector and position the spiral cable
and then install the column cover.
4. Make sure that the locating pin on the left of the spiral cable aligns
with the locating pin on the rear of the steering wheel assembly.
5. Connect the horn connector and airbag module connector.
6. After installation, check if system is working normally by us-
ing airbag warning light.
7. If the airbag warning light comes on, reset the system with
self-diagnosis function and erase all stored defectives using
Mr. Tech.
8. If airbag warning light still stays on after above step, diagnose
the system (Refer to RS-30) and repair the defective location.
Spiral Cable Inspection

z Disconnect the connectors towards airbag module and airbag
sensor from the spiral cable.
z Check continuity from each terminal.
Between spiral cable and airbag sensor unit
Terminal No. 1 - Terminal No. 1: Continuity
Terminal No. 2 - Terminal No. 2: Continuity
RS-12
Circuit Diagram
RS-13
Wiring Diagram RS/SRS-01
RS-14
RS-15
Self-Diagnosis
DIAGNOSIS USING AIRBAG WARNING LIGHT
1. The airbag warning light comes on when the ignition switch is
turned from OFF to ON.
2. Compare airbag warning light operations with chart below.
Time (sec.)
Airbag warning light operation - User Mode SRS status Reference item
Front airbag Side airbag
Normal Ta = 5 Ta = 3 -
System Check with

Tb = 8 Tb = 0
abnormal Mr. Tech
Normal
↓ Check with
Tc = 7 Tc = 2
System Mr. Tech
abnormal
System
abnormal
Td = 5 Td = 1.5 -
↓
Normal
One of following items is defective. Repair it as required.

z Blown meter fuse
z Warning LED
z Open or short airbag warning light circuit
z Defective diagnosis sensor unit
: Malfunctioning point
: Repaired point
RS-16
Diagnosis Using Mr. Tech

Isolate defective section of the SRS airbag pretensioner seatbelt
by using Mr. Tech.
RS-17
Diagnosis Using Mr. Tech
Mr. Tech Diagnostic Chart
Repair order
Diagnostic item Description
* If replaced, recheck the SRS with Mr. Tech
NO FAILURE No malfunction is detected
AIRBAG MODULE Open in driver airbag module circuit 1. Visually check the wiring harness connections
[OPEN] CURRENT/PAST (Including spiral cable) 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage
AIRBAG MODULE Driver airbag module circuit is shorted 3. Replace driver airbag module
[VB-SHORT] CURRENT/PAST to some power supply circuit (Deploy and then scrap it)
(Including spiral cable) 4. Replace diagnosis sensor unit
AIRBAG MODULE Driver airbag module circuit is shorted
[GND-SHORT] CURRENT/PAST to ground (Including spiral cable)
AIRBAG MODULE Driver airbag module circuit is shorted
[SHORT] CURRENT/PAST to each other (Including spiral cable
ASSIST A/B MODULE Open in passenger airbag module 1. Visually check the wiring harness connections
[OPEN] CURRENT/PAST circuit 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage
ASSIST A/B MODULE Passenger airbag module circuit is 3. Replace passenger airbag module
[VB-SHORT] CURRENT/PAST shorted to some power supply circuit (Deploy and then scrap it)
ASSIST A/B MODULE Passenger airbag module circuit is 4. Replace diagnosis sensor unit
[GND-SHORT] CURRENT/PAST shorted to ground
ASSIST A/B MODULE Passenger airbag module circuit is
[SHORT] CURRENT/PAST shorted to each other
LEFT SIDE A/B MODULE Open in left side airbag module circuit 1. Visually check the wiring harness connections
[OPEN] CURRENT/PAST 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage
LEFT SIDE A/B MODULE Left side airbag module circuit is 3. Replace side airbag module (left)
LEFT SIDE A/B MODULE Left side airbag module circuit is 4. Replace diagnosis sensor unit
LEFT SIDE A/B MODULE Left side airbag module circuit is
RIGHT SIDE A/B MODULE Open in right side airbag module circuit 1. Visually check the wiring harness connections
[OPEN] CURRENT/PAST 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage
RIGHT SIDE A/B MODULE Right side airbag module circuit is 3. Replace side airbag module (right)
RIGHT SIDE A/B MODULE Right side airbag module circuit is 4. Replace diagnosis sensor unit
RIGHT SIDE A/B MODULE Right side airbag module circuit is
RS-18
Repair order
Diagnostic item Description
* If replaced, recheck the SRS with Mr. Tech
LEFT SIDE COLLISION SENSOR Side sensor (left) is defective 1. Visually check the wiring harness connections
[OUT OF ORDER] CURRENT/PAST 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage
LEFT SIDE COLLISION SENSOR 3. Replace side sensor (left)
[ABNORMAL COMMUNICATION] 4. Replace diagnosis sensor unit
CURRENT/PAST
RIGHT SIDE COLLISION SENSOR Side sensor (right) is defective 1. Visually check the wiring harness connections
[OUT OF ORDER] CURRENT/PAST 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage
RIGHT SIDE COLLISION SENSOR 3. Replace side sensor (right)
[ABNORMAL COMMUNICATION] 4. Replace diagnosis sensor unit
CURRENT/PAST
CONTROL UNIT Diagnosis sensor unit is defective 1. Visually check the wiring harness connections
CURRENT/PAST 2. Replace diagnosis sensor unit
PRETENSIONER Open in pretensioner seatbelt circuit 1. Visually check the wiring harness connections
[OPEN] CURRENT/PAST 2. Replace pretensioner
PRETENSIONER Pretensioner seatbelt circuit is 1. Visually check the wiring harness connections
[VB-SHORT] CURRENT/PAST shorted to some power supply circuit 2. Replace pretensioner
[GND-SHORT] CURRENT/PAST shorted to ground 2. Replace pretensioner
[SHORT] CURRENT/PAST shorted to each other 2. Replace pretensioner
WARNING LIGHT FAILURE Open or short in airbag warning 1. Check airbag warning light circuit
CURRENT/PAST light circuit 2. Check wiring
POWER VOLTAGE FAILURE Power voltage to diagnosis sensor 1. Visually check the wiring harness connections
unit is abnormal 2. Check battery voltage
Be sure to follow the above procedure when repairing the malfunctioning components and check if the
malfunction has disappeared after the repair using the airbag warning light and Mr. Tech. If malfunction still
appears, go to the next step and stop the service if malfunction has disappeared.
RS-19
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
Front Collision
To repair the SRS after front collision, perform the following steps.
WHEN SRS IS ACTIVATED IN A COLLISION (EXCEPT FOR SIDE AIRBAG)

1. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
2. Replace the pretensioner seat belt.
3. Remove the airbag module (except for side airbag).
4. Check the SRS components using the table shown below.
z Replace any SRS components showing visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) with new one.
5. Install new airbag modules (except for side airbag).
6. By performing the “Self-diagnosis” (RS-16), check the system function by using Mr. Tech or airbag
warning light. Ensure entire SRS operates properly.
WHEN SRS IS NOT ACTIVATED IN A COLLISION

z Replace any SRS components showing visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) with new.
SRS INSPECTION
Item When SRS is activated When SRS is not activated
Airbag module Replace - Install with 1. Remove airbag module. Check harness cover and connectors for
(Driver and passenger) new bolts. damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding.
2-1. Install driver airbag module into the steering wheel to check fit
and alignment with the wheel.
2-2. Install passenger airbag module into the instrument panel to
check fit with the instrument panel.
3. No damage found, reinstall with new bolts.
4. If damaged, replace. Airbag module must be deployed before scrap.
Diagnosis sensor unit Replace - Install with 1. Check case for dents, cracks or deformation.
new bolts. 2. Check connectors for damage and terminals for deformation.
3. If no damage is found, reinstall with new bolts.
4. If damaged, replace with new bolts.
Steering wheel 1. Visually check steering wheel for deformation.
2. Check harness and connectors on the steering wheel for damage, and terminals for deformation.
3. Install airbag module to check fit or alignment with steering wheel.
4. Check steering wheel for excessive free play.
6. If damaged, replace.
Instrument panel See RS-22.
Spiral cable 1. Visually check spiral cable and combination switch for damage.
2. Check connectors and insulation tape for damage.
3. Check steering wheel for noise, binding or hard steering.
5. If damaged, replace.
Harness and connectors 1. Check connectors for poor connection, damage, and terminals for deformation.
2. Check harness for binding, cuts, deformation or chafing.
3. If no damage is found, reinstall harness and connectors.
4. If damaged, replace the damaged section. Do not attempt to repair or modify the SRS harness.
RS-20
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
Side Collision
To repair the SRS after side collision, perform the following steps.
WHEN SIDE AIRBAG IS ACTIVATED IN A COLLISION

1. Replace the following components.
- Diagnosis sensor unit
- Side sensor (for the activated side airbag)
2. Remove the deployed side airbag.
4. Install new side airbag module with new bolts.
WHEN SIDE AIRBAG IS NOT ACTIVATED IN A COLLISION

SRS INSPECTION AFTER SIDE COLLISION

Item When SRS is activated When SRS is not activated
Side airbag module Replace the seatback 1. Visually check collided side airbag module for damage (dents,
(Left or right) assembly. cracks, deformation).
2. Remove the collided side airbag module.
3. Check harness and connectors for damage, terminals for deformation.
4. Install side airbag module into the seatback to check fit and
alignment with the seat.
6. If damaged, replace with new special bolts. Airbag module must
be deployed before scrap.
Side sensor Replace the collided 1. Remove the collided side sensor. Check harness and connectors
(Left or right) side sensor with new for damage, terminals for deformation.
bolts. 2. Visually check collided side sensor for damage (dents, cracks,
deformation).
3. Install side sensor to check fit and alignment.
5. If damaged, replace with new special bolts.
Diagnosis sensor unit Replace the diagnosis 1. Check case and bracket for crack and deformation.
sensor unit with new 2. Check connectors for damage and terminals for deformation.
bolts. 3. If no damage is found, reinstall with new special bolts and
ground bolt.
4. If damaged, replace with special bolts and ground bolt.
Seat 1. Visually check the collided seat.
2. Remove the collided seat and check following components for damage and deformation.
- Harness, connector, terminals
- Frame, recliner, adjuster, slide
3. Install side airbag module into the seatback to check fit and alignment with the seat.
4. If no damage is found, reinstall the seat.
5. If damaged, replace with new bolts.
Center pillar inner 1. Check collided sections for damage (cracks, deformation).
2. If damaged, repair the center pillar inner.
RS-21
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
Instrument Panel Inspection
Item SRS airbag
1. When passenger airbag is inflated, check the following points for bending, deformation or
cracks.
z Opening portion of passenger airbag
z Passenger airbag module brackets
Instrument panel
z The portions mounting the instrument panel
2. If no damage is found, reinstall the instrument panel.

3. If damaged, replace the instrument panel and bolts.
RS-22
AIR CONDITIONER
SECTION AC
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS AND PREPARATION TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS (AUTO)
Precautions .................................................................. 2 Components Location ................................................ 8
SRS Airbag • Pretensioner Seatbelt ........................ 2 Circuit Diagram ........................................................... 9
A/C Refrigerant HFC134a Handling ........................ 2 Wiring Diagram ......................................................... 1 0
Compressor Oil ........................................................... 2
Tube Connection ......................................................... 2 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS (MANUAL)
O-Ring Part Number ................................................... 3 Components Location .............................................. 1 6
Precautions for Compressor Service ..................... 3 Circuit Diagram ......................................................... 1 7
Precautions for Cooler Cycle Service ..................... 3 Wiring Diagram ......................................................... 1 8
Precautions for Service Equipment ......................... 4
COOLER CYCLE
REFRIGERANT SYSTEM Components Diagram ............................................. 2 3
Refrigerant Cycle ........................................................ 5 Removal • Installation of Compressor ................. 2 3
Refrigerant System Protection ................................. 5 Removal • Installation of Low-Pressure
Flexible Hose ............................................................. 2 4
COMPRESSOR OIL Removal • Installation of High-Pressure
Oil Level Adjustment ................................................... 6 Flexible Hose ............................................................. 2 5
Oil Return Operation .................................................. 6 Removal • Installation of High-Pressure Pipe .... 2 5
Oil Level Adjustment When Other Components Removal • Installation of Condenser .................... 2 6
Are Replaced ............................................................... 7 Removal • Installation of Evaporator ..................... 2 7
Oil Level Adjustment When Compressor is Removal • Installation of Liquid Tank ................... 2 7
Replaced ...................................................................... 7 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor .......................... 2 7
Removal • Installation of Expansion Valve ........... 2 8
Precautions
WARNING:
z To install/remove the SRS airbag, pretensioner seatbelt system related components and harness,
turn the ignition switch “OFF”, disconnect the battery terminals and wait over 3 minutes. (This
is to discharge all the remaining electricity in the airbag sensor unit’s auxiliary power circuit.)
z Do not use air impact or electrical tools when installing/removing the components.
z Do not use any electric soldering gun or so for harness used in SRS airbag and pretensioner
seatbelt systems. Be careful with the harness not to tangle with or interfere with other
components.
z Do not use any electrical test equipments such as circuit tester when inspecting the SRS airbag
and pretensioner seatbelt circuit while installed unless the Service Manual instructs to do so.
z Do not insert any foreign materials such as a screwdriver in the airbag module and pretensioner
seatbelt connector in order to prevent unintended operation due to static electricity.
z The harnesses used in SRS airbag and pretensioner are covered with yellow insulation for
easy identification.
z Refer to “RS Restraint System” in this Service Manual for safe airbag system service information.
A/C Refrigerant HFC134a Handling

z Always use HFC134a as A/C refrigerant. If CFC12 is used, it may damage the compressor due to bad
lubrication.
z Handle the A/C refrigerant according to label on the service can. If not properly handled, it can be
exploded causing frostbite and loss of eyesight.
z Do not inhale the A/C refrigerant. It can damage your eye, nose and throat.
z HFC134a generates poisonous gas when expose to high temperature. Do not get it near to fire or so.
Properly ventilate while service.
Compressor Oil
z To meet the characteristics of the A/C refrigerant, synthetic oil is using for the compressor. There are 2
types of compressor oils to meet 2 different compressors. Always use the below designated compres-
sor oil.
For QG engine: DH-PR or PS (Rotary type compressor)
z If the rotary type compressor oil (DH-PR) and swash plate compressor oil (DH-PS) are not properly
used, compressor durability will be deteriorated. And if you use compressor oil for CFC12 (mineral
fluid), the compressor gets damaged due to lack of lubrication.
z Compressor oil for HFC134a is high moisture-absorbent. Please follow the precautions noted below.
- When cooler cycle components were removed, seal the opened hole with a cap or vinyl tape to
separate from air.
- When installing the cooler cycle components, keep the sealing just before to installation.
- When the compressor oil can was used, close the cap right away and separate from air.
z Do not inhale the compressor oil vapor. It may stir your eyes, nose and throat.
z Compressor oil for HFC134a damages styrofoam and painted surfaces (except for heat treated paint
coat). So be careful not to stain the oil in the vehicle.
Tube Connection
The new tubing method (axial seal type) is used for all cooler cycle connections except for below location.
z Between the expansion valve and evaporator
AC-2
O-Ring Part Number

Connection Method Location Bore
Inlet φ8
Heater & cooling unit
Outlet φ 16
Inlet φ 19
Compressor
Outlet
Axial Seal Type φ 12
Inlet
Condenser
Outlet φ8
Inlet
Liquid tank φ8
Outlet
Inlet
Conventional Type Expansion valve φ 16
Outlet
Precautions for Cooler Cycle Service

z Always obey the below items and label instructions during
cooler cycle service.
Refrigerant (HFC134a) capacity 550 ± 50 g
Compressor oil capacity 180 cm 3
z After removing the tubes, seal the opening with a cap or vinyl
tape right away to prevent any dust or vapor entrance.
z Always use torque wrench or backup wrench when installing
the tubes.
z When installing the A/C to the vehicle, perform the tube installation as the last stage. Also, do not open
the sealing caps until just before to the installation of tubes or other components.
z When the components are stored in a cold place, adjust the temperature of then to working place before
removing the sealing caps. This is to prevent moistening of the components.
z Completely remove moisture from the cooler cycle before recharging the A/C refrigerant.
z O-ring on the cooler cycle should be replaced with new if removed.
z Apply compressor oil at the O-ring when installing the tubes. However, be careful not to apply onto the
threads.
For QG Engine: DH-PR (for rotary type compressor)
z Completely seat the O-ring against tube bead.
z Be careful not to damage the O-ring or tubes when installing the O-ring.
z Connect the tube until it clicks. After then, tighten the nuts or bolts with hands firmly.
Check if the O-ring is properly seated.
z After connecting the tubes, check for any A/C refrigerant leakage at the connections. Disconnect the
tubes when leakage is found and replace the O-ring, then tighten the connection to the specified torque.
Precautions for Compressor Service

z Seal all openings to prevent any dust or vapor entrance.
z When the compressor is removed, the oil may enter into low-pressure space. So, place it in the same
direction as it is installed on the vehicle.
z When the compressor is replaced, adjust the compressor oil level. Refer to “Compressor Oil” in AC
section.
AC-3
z Keep the clutch and pulley surfaces clean. If the surface is stained with oil, wipe it out with a clean and
wet cloth.
z When the compressor service is completed, rotate the compressor shaft with hand to both directions at
least 5 times. This is to lubricate the compressor inside. After installing the compressor, operate the
compressor with idling speed for about 1 hour.
Precautions for Service Equipment

REFRIGERANT-RECOVERY STATION
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for station handling and maintenance. Use only designated refrigerant.
ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTOR

Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for detector handling and maintenance.
Fluids and Refrigerant

Item Application Use Remark
Refrigerant can All Charging refrigerant
Compressor oil DH-PR 40 cm3 QG engine Adding compressor oil DHC
AC-4
REFRIGERANT SYSTEM
Refrigerant System
Refrigerant Cycle
REFRIGERANT CYCLE
The refrigerant returns to the compressor through compressor, condenser, liquid tank and evaporator. The
refrigerant evaporation inside the evaporator is controlled by the expansion valve.
FREEZING PROTECTION
The compressor operates so that it can maintain the evaporator temperature to the specified range. If the
evaporator temperature goes under the specified value, then the auto amp stops the compressor. Also, if
the evaporator temperature goes above the specified value, then the auto amp operates the compressor.
Refrigerant System Protection

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
z The A/C refrigerant system is protected from high or low pressure by the refrigerant pressure sensor on
the condenser.
z When abnormal pressure in the cooler cycle (approx. more than 2.7 Mpa [28 kgf/cm2•G] or less than 0.14 Mpa
[1.4 kgf/cm 2 •G]) is detected, the refrigerant pressure sensor stops the compressor.
NOTE:
z The value in the parenthesis means gage pressure.
AC-5
COMPRESSOR OIL
Compressor Oil
Oil Level Adjustment
The compressor oil circulates in the system with refrigerant. When cooler cycle component is replaced or
large amount of refrigerant is leaked, the compressor oil should be added. It is important to maintain proper
oil level and if not properly maintained, the following troubles may occur.
z Lack of oil: Compressor sticks
z Excessive oil: Lack of cooling capacity (Due to lack of heat exchange)
Oil specification (QG engine): DH-PR (Rotary type compressor)
Oil Return Operation

Adjust oil level as follows.
1. A/C System Inspection
1. Inspect if A/C system is normally operating.
2. Inspect if large amount of refrigerant or oil is leaked.
Inspection results are OK?
OK → Go to No. 2
NG → Go to No. 3
2. Oil Return Operation

1. Start the engine and maintain the following conditions.
- Engine RPM: Idle to 1,200 RPM
- A/C or AUTO switch: ON
- Fan speed: High
- Set temperature: Full hot
2. Run the engine for about 10 minutes.
3. Stop the engine.
CAUTION:
z When refrigerant or oil is leaked a lot, do not perform the oil return operation.
→ Go to No. 3
3. Compressor Inspection
Replace the compressor?
YES → Go to “Oil Level Adjustment When Compressor is Replaced” in AC section.
NO → Go to No. 4
4. Other Components Inspection

Replace other components? (evaporator, condenser, liquid tank or refrigerant or oil)
YES → Go to “Oil Level Adjustment When Other Components are Replaced” in AC section.
NO → Perform performance check. Refer to “Performance Check” in AC section.
AC-6
COMPRESSOR OIL
Oil Level Adjustment When Other Components Are Replaced

Add oil to the compressor using the high-pressure port as below. The “α” stands for oil volume that has
released with refrigerant when removing refrigerant.
Replacing Component Adding Capacity

Evaporator 75 + α cm 3
Condenser 35 + α cm 3
Liquid tank 10 + α cm 3
CAUTION:
z When several components are replaced, do not refill refrigerant and oil respectively.
Example: Evaporator and liquid tank refill (cm 3 ) = 75 + 10 + α
Oil Level Adjustment When Compressor is Replaced

1. Drain the compressor oil from the high-pressure port and low-
pressure port and measure the volume. (The low-pressure port
has a valve inside. Press it with a minus (-) screwdriver to
drain the compressor oil.)
2. Drain the compressor oil from the new compressor as below.
The “α” stands for oil volume that has released with refrigerant
when removing refrigerant.
Oil volume (cm 3) drained from new compressor
= Oil capacity of new compressor (180) - Drained oil from
removed compressor - Remaining oil inside the compres-
sor (20) - α
= 160 - Drained oil from removed compressor - α
AC-7
AUTO TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Components Location
AC-8
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS AUTO
Circuit Diagram
AC-9
Wiring Diagram AC/AUTO A/C-01
AC-10
AC-11
AC-12
AC-13
AC-14
AC-15
MANUAL TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Components Location
Reference:
z The meter receives the compressor ON signal and the fan ON signal through the CAN communi-
cation from engine control unit and sends the signals to the AC control unit.
AC-16
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS MANUAL
Circuit Diagram
AC-17
Wiring Diagram AC/MANUAL A/C-01
AC-18
AC-19
AC-20
AC-21
AC-22
COOLER CYCLE MANUAL AND AUTO
Cooler Cycle
Components Diagram
Removal • Installation of Compressor

REMOVAL
1. Trap the refrigerant using a refrigerant-recovery station (for
HFC134a).
2. Remove the compressor connector.
3. Remove the engine under cover (right).
4. Remove the A/C compressor and alternator belt.
Refer to “Belts” (EM section).
5. Disconnect the high-pressure and low-pressure flexible hoses
from compressor.
CAUTION:
z Block the pipe’s connection with a cap or vinyl tape to
prevent air contacts.
AC-23
MANUAL AND AUTO COOLER CYCLE
6. Remove the compressor mounting bolts.

7. Remove the compressor from underneath the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
z Replace the high-pressure and low-pressure flexible hose
O-rings with new and apply compressor oil.
z Perform the compressor and alternator belt tension ad-
justment after installation.
z Check for refrigerant leakage while charging.
Compressor mounting bolts

Tightening torque: 50 - 67.6 N•m (5.1 - 6.9 kgf-m)
High-pressure flexible hose mounting bolts and nuts
Tightening torque: 7.8 - 19.6 N•m (0.8 - 2.0 kgf-m)
Low-pressure flexible hose mounting bolts and nuts
Removal • Installation of Low-Pressure Flexible

Hose
REMOVAL
HFC134a).
2. Remove the low-pressure flexible hose bracket mounting bolt.
3. Remove the low-pressure flexible hose clip.
4. Remove the low-pressure flexible hose mounting bolt’s
connection.
CAUTION:
AC-24
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
z Replace the low-pressure flexible hose O-ring with new
and apply compressor oil.
Low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure pipe mounting bolts (to evaporator)
Low-pressure flexible hose mounting bolts and nuts (to compressor)
Removal • Installation of High-Pressure Flexible Hose
REMOVAL
1. Trap the refrigerant using a refrigerant-recovery station (for HFC134a).
2. Remove the pipe clip.
3. Remove the high-pressure flexible hose bracket mounting bolt.
4. Remove the high-pressure flexible hose mounting bolt and re-
move the high-pressure flexible hose.
CAUTION:
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
z Replace the high-pressure flexible hose O-ring with new
and apply compressor oil.
High-pressure flexible hose mounting bolt

Removal • Installation of High-Pressure Pipe
REMOVAL
2. Remove the high-pressure pipe clip.
3. Remove the low-pressure flexible hose.
4. Remove the high-pressure pipe mounting bolt and remove the
high-pressure pipe.
CAUTION:
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
z Replace the high-pressure pipe O-ring with new and ap-
ply compressor oil.
High-pressure pipe mounting bolt (to condenser and evaporator)
Low-pressure flexible hose mounting nut
AC-25
Removal • Installation of Condenser

REMOVAL
HFC134a).
2. Remove the mounting bolt and disconnect the high-pressure
flexible hose and high-pressure pipe.
CAUTION:
3. Remove the fuse box from the battery relay.
4. Remove the radiator mounting bracket.

5. Remove the radiator grille.
6. Disconnect the A/C refrigerant pressure sensor connector.
7. Remove condenser bracket mounting nuts.
8. Remove the radiator from the lower mounts and then lean it
against the engine. Remove the condenser with the liquid tank
from between the radiator and the radiator core support.
CAUTION:
z Be careful not to damage the fins of the condenser and
radiator core.
9. Remove the liquid tank.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
z Replace the high-pressure pipe and high-pressure flex-
ible hose and condenser pipe (liquid tank outlet) O-rings
with new and apply compressor oil.
High-pressure flexible hose mounting bolts

Tightening torque: 7.8 - 19.6 N•m (0.8 ~2.0 kgf-m)
High-pressure pipe mounting bolts
Condenser pipe installation bolts (liquid tank outlet)
Condenser mounting bolts
Tightening torque:3.8 - 4.5 N•m (0.39 - 0.46 kgf-m)
Removal • Installation of Liquid Tank

Removal • Installation of A/C refrigerant pressure sensor
AC-26
Removal • Installation of Liquid Tank

REMOVAL
2. Remove the condenser.
3. Remove the liquid tank mounting bolt.
4. Remove the condenser pipe mounting bolt and remove the liquid tank.
CAUTION:
INSTALLATION
Condenser pipe mounting bolt
Tightening torque:
Liquid tank mounting bolt
Tightening torque:
A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor

1. Remove the condenser.
2. Remove the A/C refrigerant pressure sensor from the
condenser.
CAUTION:
z When working, be careful not to damage the condenser
fins.
z Apply compressor oil to refrigerant pressure sensor O-ring
section.
A/C refrigerant pressure sensor

Tightening torque: 7.8 - 9.8 N•m (1.0 ~1.2 kgf-m)
Removal • Installation of Evaporator

REMOVAL
HFC134a).
2. Disconnect the low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure
pipe from the evaporator.
3. Remove the insulator cover and remove the insulator.
CAUTION:
z Block the low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure
pipe connections with a cap or vinyl tape to prevent air
contacts.
4. Remove the instrument lower cover.
5. Remove the front blower duct (left).
AC-27
6. Remove the drain hose and lower case mounting screws.
7. Lower the rear part of the evaporator and put it aside rear-
wards of the vehicle with the lower case.
8. Remove the lower case.
9. Disconnect the intake air temperature sensor’s thermistor from
the evaporator and remove the evaporator.
INSTALLATION
z Replace the low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure
pipe O-rings with new and apply compressor oil.
z Mark the mounting location of the intake air temperature
sensor’s thermistor.
z Do not rotate the termistor when removing/installing the
intake air temperature sensor.
Removal • Installation of Expansion Valve

1. Remove the insulator cover.
2. Remove the insulator.
3. Remove the pipe block and expansion valve.
Expansion valve mounting bolt

AC-28
AUDIO AND VIDEO
SECTION AV
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint Troubles In Radio, Tape and CD - Changer ........ 1 0
System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT Error Indication .......................................................... 1 0
PRE-TENSIONER” ...................................................... 2 Troubles in Radio Only ............................................ 11
Troubles in CD Only ................................................. 1 2
AUDIO Noise Inspection ....................................................... 1 2
Audio Unit ..................................................................... 3 Type of Noise and Possible Cause ...................... 1 2
Precautions .................................................................. 3 Power Supply Circuit Check for Audio Unit .......... 1 2
Audio Unit Standard ................................................... 4 Speaker Inspection .................................................. 1 3
Circuit Diagram ........................................................... 5 Antenna Inspection ................................................... 1 3
Wiring Diagram ........................................................... 6 Radio Inspection ....................................................... 1 3
Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit ..... 9 Antenna Location ...................................................... 1 3
GLASS ANTENNA REPAIR

Glass Antenna Repair .............................................. 1 4
Open-Circuit Repair ................................................. 1 5
PRECAUTION
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for
certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and
SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
z To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury
or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance
must be performed by an authorized RENAULT SAMSUNG dealer.
z Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, and disconnect both battery cables.
Then wait at least 3 minutes. (This is to discharge all the remaining electricity in the airbag
sensor unit’s auxiliary power circuit.)
z Do not use any electrical test equipments such as circuit tester when inspecting the SRS
airbag and pretensioner seatbelt circuit while installed unless instructed to in this Ser-
vice Manual. (The weak current in the tester can cause the SRS airbag to operate.)
z Do not insert any foreign materials such as a screwdriver in the airbag module and
pretensioner seatbelt connector in order to prevent unintended operation due to static
electricity.
z Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to
personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system.
z Do not leave SRSairbag unit and pre-tensioner seat belt related components in the place
where the temperature is above 80°C.
z Be careful not to drop or jar the SRS airbag unit and related components.
z Do not re-use the inflated SRS airbag unit and pre-tensioner seat belt assembly.
AV-2
AUDIO
Audio Unit
Part number Model AUX function
1 DIN AM/FM/TAPE
56120-52100 -
1 DIN AM/FM/CDP
56120-52100 z
Precautions
z Use neutral detergent when cleaning the LCD display. Never use any organic detergent(such as
thinner and gasoline) and chemical detergent.
z Connect/disconnect connectors while the power is turned off.
z Before service, be sure to disconnect the negative (-) terminal of the battery.
z When electrical system is suspicious for trouble symptoms, inspect the fuse, connector open-circuit,
terminal dislocation and bad connection first.
CAUTION:
z To repair the open-circuit or connector dislocation, refer to the circuit diagram and wiring
diagram.
AV-3
AUDIO
Audio Unit Standard

Function AM/FM radio, CD deck, CD changer, remote control, H/Free function, AUX
Radio z One-touch memory function allows storing 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations.
z The stations with the strongest signals will automatically be received and set in the radio
station memory/calling buttons (1 to 6) in order of the frequency. (AUTO MEMORY)
z Tuning stops automatically when a station is found (SEEK)
Tuning PLL frequency synchronizer system
Frequency range AM 531 KHz ~ 1,602 KHz, FM 87.5 MHz ~ 108.0 MHz
Mid frequency AM 450 KHz, FM 10.7 MHz
Usable sensitivity Below AM 34 dBu (at S/N 20Db), below FM 13 dBu (at S/N 30 Db)
Automatic stop AM 32 ± 6 dBu, FM 25 ± 6 dBu
sensitivity
Tape Usable tape 4 track, 2 channel stereo cassette tape play deck
Speed -1 ~ +4%
FF/REW speed 110 sec. (C-60)
Signal to noise ratio Normal tape (120us): -45 dB / 52 dB (DOLBY NR ON)
Metal tape (70us): -47 dB / 54 dB (DOLBY NR ON)
CD player z 12 cm compact disk player
z The current track is played repeatedly (REPEAT: RPT)
z All the tracks on the current CD are played in random order (RANDOM: RDM)
z The selected music is played (BOOKMARK ).
z Compression file (MP3, WMA) can be played.
z Track up/down
z Shows file structure (folders and file names).
Frequency charac- 17 Hz (6.5 ± 3 dBu), 20 KHz (7.0 ± 3 dBu)
teristics
Signal to noise ratio Over 70 dB
AUX z Can connect and play a portable audio system and MP3 player by using AUX port.
TEL z Hands-free function and privacy talk function
Other functions z Remote control function
z EQ (Classic, Jazz, Rock) control function
z 5.8" FSTN LCD
z Auto power on function
z Rheostatic function for display (12 stages)
Error notification To protect the audio system, the advanced sensor in the system detects errors and notify it to
function driver.
Specifications Load impedance 4 Ω/CH
OUTPUT 43W × 4CH
Battery voltage DC 13.2 V (10.8 V ~ 15.6 V)
Backup current Less than 3 mA
AV-4
AUDIO
Circuit Diagram
AV-5
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram AU/Audio-01
AV-6
AUDIO
AV-7
AUDIO
AV-8
AUDIO
Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit

Terminal Input/ Measuring condition
Example of
(Wire color) Signal name Output Ignition Operation or Reference value
symptom
signal switch condition
+ -
No sound from front

Front door When receiving
4 (L) 3 (L/B) Output ON door speaker RH and
speaker (RH) audio signal
tweeter RH.
No sound from front

Front door When receiving
2 (Pu) 1 (P) Output ON door speaker LH and
speaker (LH) audio signal
tweeter LH.
Body Battery power System does not

6 (BR) Input OFF - Battery voltage
ground supply work properly.
lighting switch ON Audio unit illumination
Approx. 12 V
Body Illumination (1st position) does not come on when
7 (R/L) Input ON
ground signal Lighting switch lighting switch is ON
Approx. 0 V (1st position).
OFF
Body Ignition switch System does not
9 (P/L) Input ACC - Battery voltage
ground ACC work properly.
Body
10 (B) Ground - ON - Approx. 0 V -
ground
Rear door When receiving

14 (L) 13 (P) Output ON
speaker LH audio signal
Rear door When receiving

15 (L/Y) 16 (L/W) Output ON
speaker RH audio signal
Press VOL+ Approx 0 - 0.4V

Press VOL- Approx 0.9 - 1.1V
System does not
Press SEEK+ Approx 1.8 - 2.1V
Steering wheel work properly.
27 (R/W) 28 (G) Input ON Press SEEK- Approx 2.8 - 3.1V
switch (DATA)
Press MODE Approx 3.9 - 4.1V
No switch
Approx 5V -
operation
Steering wheel
Body
28 (G) switch signal - ON - Approx 0V -
ground
ground
AV-9
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Trouble Diagnosis
External causes (bad CD or tape) or miss-manipulation makes troubles on the audio system. Check follow-
ing items fully before service.
Troubles In Radio, Tape and CD - Changer

Symptoms Check Point Result Possible Cause & Remedy
Is the ignition switch is in ACC? No Turn the ignition switch to ACC
Is the 10 A (No. “16”, in fuse block) normal? No Replace the 10 A fuse (No. “16”, in fuse block)
Does not operate at all
(No digital display and Is audio case ground normal? No Secure the case ground
sound) Is there battery voltage (about 12 V) on radio Yes Remove and repair the audio
connector terminal No. “6” & “9” when ignition
switch is ON? No Inspect vehicle power system
Is the volume at minimum? Yes Increase the volume and recheck

Are BAL and FAD selections at center? No Select the center and recheck
No sound Is there AC voltage at audio connector terminal No. Check speaker wires and wires between
Yes
“1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “13”, “14”, “15” and “16” and is it the speaker and audio
varies when VOL is changed? No Remove and repair the audio
Is FAD selection at center? No Select the center and recheck
No sound from the rear Is there AC voltage at audio connector terminal No. Check sub woofer wires and wires
Yes
speaker only “13”, “14”, “15” and “16” and is it varies when between audio unit and sub woofer
VOL is changed? No Remove and repair the audio
Are the BASS and TREB VR selections at center? No Select the center and recheck
Too noisy Check speaker wires and wires between
Is the sound OK when fine speakers are Yes
Bad sound quality the speaker and audio unit
connected to the audio unit output directly?
No Remove and repair the audio
Error Indication
To protect the CD integrated AM/FM audio system, the advanced sensor in the system detects errors and
displays the error code on the screen.
If an error code is displayed on the screen, have the system checked at authorized audio service center.
Error Error code
Temperature error → over 82°C Error TEMP.
MECH ERROR ERROR 1
SERVO ERROR ERROR 2
DISC ERROR ERROR 3
TIMER ERROR ERROR 4
AV-10
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Troubles in Radio Only

Symptoms Check point Result Possible cause & Remedy
Yes Remove and repair the audio
No sound Is it tuned at fine station?
No Tune to fine station and recheck
Is it tuned at fine station? No Tune to fine station and recheck
When the vehicle is far away from the
Is the receiving frequency weak? Yes broadcasting station, it normally receives
weak frequency
Are there any foreign objects (window tinting film

Reinstall the foreign objects away from the
or accessory antenna) on the rear window? Yes
Too noisy glass antenna
(Note 1)
Is the symptom apparent in a specific region? It is not a malfunction because it happens in

Yes
(Note 2) a specific region.
1. Check the antenna
Yes
Are the antenna cable and radio grounds OK? 2. Remove and repair the audio
No Repair the troubling component
1. Bad radio ground 1. Check radio ground
2. Loose or out of ground 2. Check or tighten the ground
Radio (AM & FM) is 3. Ignition condenser or rear window defogger 3. Check ignition condenser or rear window
noisy while engine noise control condenser defogger noise control condenser
running 4. Alternator 4. Check alternator
5. Ignition coil or secondary wire 5. Check ignition coil or secondary wire
6. Audio 6. Remove and repair the audio
1. Bad radio ground 1. Check radio ground
Radio (AM & FM) is 2. Antenna 2. Check antenna
noisy when other
3. Bad ground of other equipment 3. Check ground of other equipment
equipment is turned on
4. Defective other equipment 4. Replace other equipment
It is normal but happens when battery is

Is the audio connector terminal No. “6” connection Yes replaced or audio connectors are recon-
No preset memories
OK? nected
No Secure the terminal connection
No preset memories Is the 15 A fuse (No. “31”, in fuse block) normal? No Replace 15 A fuse (No. “31”, in fuse block)
when ignition switch is
turned off Is there battery voltage (about 12 V) on radio Yes Remove and repair the audio
connector terminal No. “6” when ignition switch
is ON? No Inspect vehicle power system
CAUTION:
1. It causes the glass antenna’s receiving sensitivity to decrease.
2. It is the noise caused by electrical fluctuation such as the fading noise and multi-pass
noise; and outer noise such as the train. It is not a malfunction.
z Fading Noise
It is the noise generated when mountains or buildings that cause the changing frequency
intensity in narrow spaces intercept the frequency.
z Multi-pass noise
It is the noise generated by the timing difference of the time the frequency reflected from
the mountains or buildings reaches the antenna and the time the frequency sent from the
broadcaster reaches the antenna.
AV-11
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Troubles in CD Only
Symptoms Check item
CD cannot be inserted.
CD cannot be ejected. z CD
CD cannot be played. z Audio unit (CD player)
The sound skips, stops suddenly, or is distorted.
Noise Inspection
The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunction.
Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and
operation of each piece of electrical equipment, and determine the cause.
The source of the noise can be found easily by listening to the noise while removing the fuses of
electrical components, one by one.
Type of Noise and Possible Cause

Symptoms Check item
Occurs only when A continuous growling noise occurs. The speed of Ignition condenser
engine is ON. the noise varies with changes in the engine speed.
A whistling noise occurs while the engine speed Alternator
is high. A booming noise occurs while the engine
is running and the lighting switch is ON.
The occurrence of the noise is linked with the operation of the fuel pump. Fuel pump condenser
Noise only occurs A cracking or snapping sound occurs with the Relay malfunction, radio malfunction
when various electri- operation of various switches.
cal components are The noise occurs when various motors are z Motor case ground
operating. operating. z Motor
The noise occurs constantly, not just under certain conditions. z Rear window defogger coil malfunction
z Poor ground of antenna amp. or an-
tenna feeder line
A cracking or snapping sound occurs while the vehicle is being driven. z Ground wire malfunction
(especially when it is vibrating excessively) z Ground due to incorrect installation of
parts
z Wiring connections or a short circuit
Power Supply Circuit Check for Audio Unit

1. Check fuse
Check fuses for blown-out.
Unit Signal Fuse No.
Audio unit Battery power supply 31
Ignition switch ACC or ON 16
REFERENCE:
For mounting locations of fuses and fusible link, refer to PG section.
OK or NG
OK → GO TO 2.
NG → If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
AV-12
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Speaker Inspection
1. Disconnect the speaker harness connector.
2. Measure the resistance between the speaker terminal “No. 1” and “No. 2”.
z The resistance should be 2 - 4 Ω.
3. Momentarily connect the 9-volt battery to the speaker terminal “No. 1” and “No. 2” using the jumper wire.
z There should be a kind of sparking sound.
Antenna Inspection
1. Secure the antenna ground using an auxiliary jumper wire.
z If receiving capacity improves check the antenna ground (body side).
Radio Inspection
Measure every voltage under following conditions.
z Ignition switch ON or ACC.
z Radio ON.
z Connection between the radio and speaker.
Antenna Location
AV-13
Glass Antenna Repair

OPEN-CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1. Place the circuit tester’s probes (resistance mode) at both
terminals of the antenna.
2. There will be no resistance if grid is open.
3. In order to locate the open grid, move the probe following the
grid lines. When the probe passes through the open grid, the
tester needle will shake.
AV-14
Open-Circuit Repair
REPAIR EQUIPMENT
1. Conductive silver composition
2. 30 cm ruler
3. Drawing pen
4. Dryer
5. Alcohol
6. Cloth
REPAIR PROCEDURE
1. Wipe the open grid and clean the surroundings with a cloth
dampened in alcohol.
2. Apply a small amount of conductive silver composition to tip of
drawing pen.
Shake silver composition container before use.
3. Place the ruler on the glass following the open grid. Apply the
silver composition with drawing pen at the cut location. Over-
lap about 5 mm on both existing grids.
4. After repairing, check repaired grid for continuity.
This inspection should be performed 10 minutes after the repair.
Do not touch the repaired location while testing.
5. Apply heat at the repaired location for about 20 minutes with a

dryer. Maintain the dryer (heat gun) at least 3 cm from the
window. If a heat gun is not available, wait about 24 hours.
AV-15
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION EL
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS Switch Circuit Inspection ......................................... 1 6
SRS Airbag • Pretensioner Seatbelt ........................ 3 Removal • Installation
General precautions in service ................................ 3 of Front Turn Signal Lamp ...................................... 1 7
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING of Side Turn Signal Lamp ....................................... 1 7
Circuit Diagram ........................................................... 4 Removal • Installation
of Rear Turn Signal Lamp ....................................... 1 7
BATTERY Removal • Installation
Precautions in Handling ............................................ 5 of Hazard Switch ....................................................... 1 7
Inspection ..................................................................... 5 Circuit Diagram ......................................................... 1 8
Charging Procedure ................................................... 6
CLEARANCE LAMP • TAIL LAMP • LICENSE PLATE
LAMP
STARTING SYSTEM Bulb Replacement .................................................... 1 9
Removal • Installation of Starter Motor ................... 7 Removal • Installation .............................................. 1 9
Circuit Diagram ......................................................... 2 0
CHARGING SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnosis ...................................................... 8 STOP LAMP
Removal • Installation of Alternator ......................... 9 Bulb Replacement .................................................... 2 1
Removal • Installation .............................................. 2 1
COMBINATION SWITCH High-Mounted Stop Lamp ........................................ 2 1
Removal • Installation of Combination Switch .... 1 0 Removal • Installation of High-Mounted Stop Lamp
Removal • Installation .............................................. 1 0 (Bulb Type) ................................................................. 2 1
Switch Circuit Inspection ......................................... 1 0
REVERSE LAMP
HEADLAMP Bulb Replacement .................................................... 2 2
Aiming Adjustment .................................................... 11 Removal • Installation .............................................. 2 2
Adjustment Using an Optical Aimer ...................... 11
Adjustment Using an Aiming Screen FRONT FOG LAMP
(Adjustment by Using Beam Pattern) ................... 1 2 Aiming Adjustment .................................................... 2 3
Bulb Replacement .................................................... 1 3 Inspection Before Adjustment ................................ 2 3
Removal • Installation .............................................. 1 3 Adjustment Using an Aiming Screen
Trouble Diagnosis .................................................... 1 4 (Adjustment by Using Beam Pattern) ................... 2 3
Bulb Replacement .................................................... 2 4
TURN SIGNAL LAMP • HAZARD LAMP Removal • Installation .............................................. 2 4
Rear Combination Lamp ......................................... 1 5
Bulb Replacement .................................................... 1 5 ROOM LAMP
Removal • Installation .............................................. 1 5 Bulb Replacement .................................................... 2 5
MAP LAMP
of Light/Turn Signal Switch ..................................... 1 6
CONTENTS
TRUNK ROOM LAMP Remote Controller Inspection ................................ 4 1
OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
COMBINATION METER Outside Rearview Mirror .......................................... 4 2
Removal • Installation of Combination Meter ...... 2 8 Timer Function .......................................................... 4 2
Circuit Diagram ......................................................... 2 9 Precautions in Handling Electrical
Specifications ............................................................ 3 0 Folding Mirror ............................................................. 4 2
COMBINATION METER - GAGE DIGITAL CLOCK

Component Inspection ............................................ 3 1 Clock Adjustment ...................................................... 4 3
Removal • Installation of Clock .............................. 4 3
COMBINATION METER - WARNING LIGHT
Warning Light ............................................................ 3 2 HORN
Component Inspection ............................................ 3 2 Horn ............................................................................. 4 4
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
System - General ...................................................... 3 3 CIGARETTE LIGHTER / POWER SOCKET
Anti-Pinch Function ................................................... 3 3 Cigarette Lighter of Removal • Installation .......... 4 5
Components Location .............................................. 3 4 Power Socket of Removal • Installation ............... 4 5
Circuit Diagram ......................................................... 3 5
TRUNK LID OPENER
Power Window Main Switch Input/Output Signal
Standards ................................................................... 3 6 Operation .................................................................... 4 6
Each Power Window Switch Input/Output Signal Removal • Installation .............................................. 4 6
Standards ................................................................... 3 8
FRONT WIPER • WASHER SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnosis by Symptoms .......................... 3 9
System - General ...................................................... 4 7
DOOR LOCK INDICATOR
Door Lock Indicator .................................................. 4 0
REMOTE CONTROLLER
Remote Controller .................................................... 4 1
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions
CAUTION:
z To install/remove the SRS airbag, pretensioner seatbelt system related components and harness,
turn the ignition switch “OFF”, disconnect the negative (-) terminal of the battery and wait over
3 minutes. (This is to discharge all the remaining electricity in the airbag sensor unit’s auxil-
iary power circuit.)
z Do not use any electric soldering gun or so for harness used in SRS airbag and pretensioner
seatbelt systems. Be careful with the harness not to tangle with or interfere with other
components.
and pretensioner seatbelt circuit while installed unless the Service Manual instructs to do so.
z The harnesses used in SRS airbag and pretensioner are covered with yellow corrugate tube or
insulation tape and installed on yellow connector for easy identification.
z Refer to “RS Restraint System” in this Service Manual for safe airbag system service information.
General Precautions in Service

z Do not touch the bulb glass with bare hand or stain oil. Do not touch the bulb when lighted or right after
turning off. It is extremely hot.
z When you leave the removed bulb for a long time, the bulb performance decreases due to lens and
reflector dusting (dirty and dark). Perform the bulb replacement after preparing a new bulb.
z Aiming adjust screw should be turned towards tightening direction. (If have to be adjusted reverse direction,
loosen enough and then tighten to adjust.)
z Do not use organic detergent (thinner or gasoline) when removing the dirt or sealant at the lamp.
z When replacing the bulb, grab the bulb socket and pull it out backwards right away. (When you pull it
out sideways by grabbing the harness, the bulb may fall inside the lamp and it is hard to take it out.)
EL-3
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
Circuit Diagram
EL-4
BATTERY
Battery
Precautions in Handling
CAUTION:
z When you have to jump start the engine using battery and the jumper cable, use only 12 V
battery.
z After battery cable connection, check if it is securely tightened on the terminal.
z During regular inspection, check the electrolyte level.
OVER DISCHARGING PREVENTION

In order to prevent from battery over-discharging, be sure to fol-
low as below.
z Always keep the battery surface (specially the upper surface)
clean and dry.
z Keep the terminal connections clean and securely tightened.
z During regular inspection, check the electrolyte level.
z Disconnect the negative (-) terminal of the battery when not

using the vehicle for a long period of time.
z Check the battery charge status.

Check the electrolyte level periodically and check the battery charge status to prevent from over-
discharge.
Inspection
ELECTROLYTE LEVEL
Visually inspect if the battery cell’s electrolyte level is within the specified level (between MAX and MIN
marks).
If the level is low, remove the cap and add the electrolyte to the MAX mark.
CAUTION:
z The battery fluid has a strong corrosion characteristic so be careful not to stain in your skin,
clothes or vehicle. When stained, wash it out with water. Also, do not touch or rub your eyes
after touching the battery. If the battery fluid has stained in your eyes, skin or clothes, wash it
out in running water for about 15 minutes and consult with a doctor if stained in your eyes.
z If the battery is contaminated, wash it with water or warm water.
z Use battery fluid or distilled water when adding. If you use tab water, it can cause reduction or
discharging.
EL-5
BATTERY
Charging Procedure
Perform the charging following the charger’s instruction manual.
CAUTION:
z There are 2 kinds of charging procedures: “Normal charge” and “Quick charge”.
Normal charge: Charging used for battery capacity recovery.
Quick charge: Charging used for emergency recovery just enough to start the engine.
z Do not perform “Quick charge” for batteries not fully charged.
Normally perform the “Normal charge”.
z The standard charging rate is 1/10 of 5-hour rate capacity for “Normal charge” and 1/2 of 5-hour
rate capacity for “Quick charge”.
z Keep away from flammables when charging the battery.
z When connecting the battery to the charger, connect the lead wire first and then turn on the
charger. If you turn on the charger first, it may cause sparks.
z The battery electrolyte temperature while charging must be maintained at under 45°C for “Nor-
mal charge” and under 55°C for “Quick charge”.
z The quick charge dissipates a lot of heat since it is being charged at a high rate. Do not per-
form this charging for more than 30 minutes.
REFERENCE:
z While charging the battery, the charger’s current decreases gradually. This indicates that the
battery’s voltage is increasing at a normal rate as it is being charged.
Consider the following cautions during operation.
CAUTION:
z Remove the negative (-) terminal first and install the posi-
tive (+) terminal first.
z Tighten the bolts with the specified torque shown below.
Battery fix frame

Mounting nut
Tightening torque:
3.5 - 5.3 N•m (0.35 - 0.55 kgf-m)
Battery cable
Tightening nut
Tightening torque:
3.0 - 5.1 N•m (0.30 - 0.51 kgf-m)
EL-6
STARTING SYSTEM
Starting System
Removal • Installation of Starter Motor
REMOVAL
1. Remove the negative (-) cable of the battery.
2. Remove the air duct.
3. Remove the starter motor upper mounting bolt.
4. Disconnect the starter motor “S” and “B” terminals from the bottom of the vehicle.
5. Remove the starter motor lower mounting bolt and remove the starter motor from under the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
EL-7
CHARGING SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnosis
EL-8
CHARGING SYSTEM
Removal • Installation of Alternator
REMOVAL
1. Remove the negative (-) terminal of the battery.
2. Remove the alternator belt.
3. Remove the alternator connector and B terminal mounting nut.

4. Remove the alternator bracket.
5. Remove the alternator mounting bolt and remove the alternator
upwards.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal cautioning as below.
z Adjust the belt tension after installation.
CAUTION:
z Tighten the B terminal mounting nut extra carefully.
EL-9
COMBINATION SWITCH
Combination Switch
Removal • Installation of Combination Switch
CAUTION:
z Refer to “Spiral Cable” in “Restraint System” in RS
section.
z Each switch can be replaced respectively without removing the

combination switch base.
z Remove the screws when removing the combination switch
base.
z Install the cancel crow mark (R) downwards when installing

the combination switch base.
REMOVAL
When removing or installing the airbag module and the spiral cable,
refer to the RS section in Service Manual Electric.
z Each switch can be replaced respectively without removing the
combination switch base.
z Remove the switch base fixing screws to remove the combina-
tion switch base.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Switch Circuit Inspection

Using a circuit tester, inspect the continuity between the termi-
nals during light/turn signal switch operation.
EL-10
HEADLAMP
Headlamp
Aiming Adjustment
z Adjust by rotating the aiming adjust screw.

z Refer to the illustration for adjust screw location.
CAUTION:
z Turn the aiming adjust screw towards tightening direction. (If have to be adjusted reverse
direction, loosen enough and then tighten to adjust.)
PREPARATION BEFORE ADJUSTMENT

1. Let the vehicle empty (Remove all objects from the vehicle’s interior and trunk).
2. Clean the headlamp.
CAUTION:
z Do not use any organic detergent (thinner or gasoline).
3. Start the engine.

4. Let one person sit on the driver’s seat.
Adjustment Using an Optical Aimer

1. Park the vehicle in front of the tester and maintain the specified
distance (1 or 3 m) between the headlamp and the tester lens.
2. Check if the vehicle is facing the tester directly by using
viewfinder. If not facing directly, adjust the position by using a
correction handle.
3. Turn on the headlamp (high beam) and move the tester so that
the light illuminates the tester front.
4. Set the up and down, and, left and right angle adjust handle to
the standard values and then rotate the aiming adjust screw
so that the light beam points the center of indicator needle.
CAUTION:
z Refer to tester’s instruction manual for details.
EL-11
HEADLAMP
Adjustment Using an Aiming Screen

(Adjustment by Using Beam Pattern)
1. Prepare an aiming screen (adjustment by using beam pattern)
as shown in the illustration using a white paper board.
2. Park the vehicle in front of the wall or partition (perpendicular

with the road) on the level ground.
3. Mark the center point of the headlamp on the wall or partition.
4. Place the aiming screen at the wall or partition so that the
marked center point matches with the hole on the aiming screen
and then fix it to be parallel with the road surface.
5. Maintain the 3 m of distance between the aiming screen and

the headlamp in parallel as A = B.
6. Block the headlamp light that is not being adjusted with a
partition.
CAUTION:
z Do not cover the lens surface with a mask since it is the
resin-type lens.
7. Inspect the headlamp (low beam).

8. Adjust the headlamp aiming as shown in the illustration to meet
the brightness boundary line in the aiming screen.
BRIGHTNESS INSPECTION
Standard Value:
More than 15,000 candelas (cd)
EL-12
HEADLAMP
Bulb Replacement
1. Remove the headlamp connector.
2. Remove the headlamp cover.
3. Remove the retaining spring and remove the bulb.
4-lamp type
Headlamp (High): 12 V, 55 W (H1)
Headlamp (Low): 12 V, 55 W (H7)
Clearance lamp: 12 V, 5 W
CAUTION:
z Do not touch the bulb glass with bare hand or stain oil.
Do not touch the bulb when lighted or right after turning
off. It is extremely hot.
z When you leave the removed bulb for a long time, the
bulb performance decreases due to lens and reflector
dusting (dirty and dark). Perform the bulb replacement
after preparing a new bulb.
z After installing the bulb, securely fasten the headlamp
cover to assure water resistance.
REMOVAL
1. Remove the headlamp, clearance lamp and front turn signal
lamp connectors.
2. Remove the front turn signal lamp. Refer to “Removal • Instal-
lation of Front Turn Signal Lamp” in “Turn Signal Lamp and
Hazard Lamp” (EL-37).
3. Remove the bolts (3 EA) and remove the headlamp from the vehicle
while disconnecting the lamp from the headlamp lower clip.
INSTALLATION
Headlamp mounting screw

Tightening torque:
4.4 - 6.5 N•m (0.45 - 0.66 kgf-m)
EL-13
HEADLAMP
Trouble Diagnosis
Symptoms Probable cause Corrective action
Headlamp high beam does not il- 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.
luminate (both sides). 2. Headlamp (high) relay 2. Check headlamp (high) relay.
3. 15 A fuse 3. Check 15 A fuse (No. 58, located in fusible link).
4. Lighting switch 4. Check lighting switch.
Headlamp low beam does not il- 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.
luminate (both sides). 2. Headlamp (low) relay 2. Check headlamp (low) relay.
3. 15 A fuse 3. Check 15 A fuse (No. 59, located in fusible link).
4. Lighting switch 4. Check lighting switch.
LH high beam does not operate, 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.
but LH low beam operates. 2. Open in LH high beam circuit 2. Check R wire between joint connector and LH
headlamp for an open circuit.
LH low beam does not operate, 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.
but LH high beam operates. 2. Open in LH low beam circuit 2. Check R/Y wire between joint connector and
LH headlamp for an open circuit.
RH high beam does not operate, 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.
but RH low beam operates. 2. Open in RH high beam circuit 2. Check R wire between joint connector and LH
headlamp for an open circuit.
RH low beam does not operate, 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.
but RH high beam operates. 2. Open in RH low beam circuit 2. Check R/Y wire between joint connector and
LH headlamp for an open circuit.
High beam indicator lamp does not 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb in combination meter.
operate. 2. High beam circuit ground 2. Check combination meter ground.
3. Open in high beam circuit 3. Check wire between joint connector and com-
bination meter for an open circuit.
EL-14
TURN SIGNAL LAMP • HAZARD LAMP
Rear Combination Lamp
Bulb Replacement
Stop/Tail lamp: 12 V, 21/5 W
Rear turn signal lamp: 12 V, 21 W
Reverse lamp: 12 V, 16 W
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear wheelhouse finisher. Refer to “Trunk Trim and
Trunk Lid Trim” in “Body and Trim” in BT section.
2. Remove the nuts (4 EA) and remove the assembly from the
vehicle by pressing the lamp from the trunk room.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
Rear combination lamp mounting nut

Tightening torque:
2.5 - 3.8 N•m (0.26 - 0.39 kgf-m)
EL-15
Light/Turn Signal Switch
REMOVAL
1. Remove the steering column cover. Refer to “Steering Column”
in “Power Steering” in ST section.
2. Remove the light/turn signal switch connector.
3. Remove the screws (2 EA) and remove the light/turn signal
switch from the base.
INSTALLATION
Switch Circuit Inspection

Using a circuit tester, inspect the continuity between the termi-
nals during light/turn signal switch operation.
EL-16
Removal • Installation of Front Turn Signal Lamp

REMOVAL
Press the upper mounting section of the lamp using a minus (-)
screwdriver, pull towards the front of the vehicle and remove.
Wrap the screwdriver with a tape or cloth to prevent from scratch-
ing the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
Insert the lamp mounts (2 EA) into the lamp mounting holes and
install the lamp assembly by pressing it in.
Front turn signal lamp mounting nut

Tightening torque:
2.5 - 3.8 N•m (0.26 - 0.39 kgf-m)
Removal • Installation of Side Turn Signal Lamp

REMOVAL
1. Press the side turn signal lamp towards the arrow A direction
in the illustration. Pull towards the B direction and remove it
from the vehicle.
2. Remove the side turn signal lamp connector.
INSTALLATION
Bulb Replacement (Front Turn Signal Lamp)

Remove the bulb socket by turning it to the arrow direction in the
figure.
Front turn signal lamp: 12 V, 21 W
Removal • Installation of Rear Turn Signal Lamp

Refer to “Removal • Installation” in “Rear Combination Lamp” in
EL section for details.
Removal • Installation of Hazard Switch

REMOVAL
1. Remove the cluster lid C. Refer to “Instrument Assembly” in
“Body and Trim” in BT section.
2. Using a minus (-) screwdriver, press the hazard switch mount
and remove from the cluster lid C.
INSTALLATION
EL-17
Circuit Diagram
EL-18
CLEARANCE LAMP • TAIL LAMP • LICENSE PLATE LAMP
Clearance Lamp • Tail Lamp • License Plate Lamp
BULB REPLACEMENT - CLEARANCE LAMP
Refer to “Bulb Replacement” in “Headlamp” in EL section for details.
BULB REPLACEMENT - TAIL LAMP

Refer to “Bulb Replacement” in “Rear Combination Lamp” in EL section for details.
REMOVAL • INSTALLATION OF CLEARANCE LAMP

Refer to “Removal • Installation” in “Headlamp” in EL section for details.
REMOVAL • INSTALLATION OF TAIL LAMP

Refer to “Removal • installation” in “Rear Combination Lamp” in EL section for details.
Bulb Replacement - License Plate Lamp

1. Using a screwdriver, unscrew the 2 screws at both ends of the
lamp to remove and then remove the lens.
2. Replace the bulb.
License plate lamp: 12 V, 5 W
Removal • Installation of License Plate Lamp

REMOVAL
1. Remove the screws on both sides and the clip on the center to
remove the license plate lamp.
2. Remove the license plate lamp connector.
INSTALLATION
EL-19
CLEARANCE LAMP • TAIL LAMP • LICENSE PLATE LAMP
Circuit Diagram
EL-20
STOP LAMP
Stop Lamp
Bulb Replacement
Refer to “Removal • Installation” in “Rear Combination Lamp” in EL section for details.
High-Mounted Stop Lamp

BULB REPLACEMENT
1. Remove the high-mounted stop lamp.
2. Remove the bulb socket by rotating it as shown in the
illustration.
High-mounted stop lamp: 12 V, 21 W
Removal • Installation of High-Mounted Stop Lamp

(Bulb Type)
REMOVAL
1. Push towards the rear of the vehicle.
2. Pull it upwards.
3. Pull towards the front of the vehicle and remove.
4. Remove the connector.
INSTALLATION
EL-21
REVERSE LAMP
Reverse Lamp
Bulb Replacement
Refer to “Removal • Installation” in “Rear Combination Lamp” in EL section for details.
EL-22
FRONT FOG LAMP
Front Fog Lamp
Aiming Adjustment
z Adjust the aiming by rotating the aiming adjust screw.
z Refer to the illustration for adjust screw location.
CAUTION:
z Adjust the aiming adjust screw to the tightening direction.
(If have to be adjusted reverse direction, loosen enough
and then tighten to adjust.)
Inspection Before Adjustment

1. Adjust the tire pressure to specified values.
2. Let the vehicle empty. (Remove all objects from the vehicle’s
interior and trunk.)
3. Remove the dirt from the fog lamp.
CAUTION:
z Do not use any organic detergent (thinner or gasoline).
4. Start the engine.

5. Let one person sit on the driver’s seat.
Adjustment Using an Aiming Screen

(Adjustment by Using Beam Pattern)
1. Prepare an aiming screen (adjustment by using beam pattern)
as shown in the illustration using a white paper board.
2. Park the vehicle in front of the wall or partition (perpendicular

with the road) on the level ground.
3. Mark the center point of the fog lamp on the wall or partition.
4. Place the aiming screen at the wall or partition so that the
marked center point matches with the hole on the aiming screen
and then fix it to be parallel with the road surface.
EL-23
FRONT FOG LAMP
5. Maintain the 3 m of distance between the aiming screen and

the headlamp in parallel as A = B.
6. Block the headlamp light that is not being adjusted with a
partition.
7. Inspect the fog lamp.
8. Adjust the fog lamp aiming as shown in the illustration to meet

the brightness boundary line in the aiming screen.
Bulb Replacement
1. Disconnect the harness connector and remove the bulb socket
by rotating it counterclockwise.
2. Replace the whole assembly since the bulb is integrated into
the socket.
Fog Lamp: 12 V, 35 W (H8)
CAUTION:
z Do not touch the bulb glass with bare hand or stain oil.
Do not touch the bulb when lighted or right after turning
off. It is extremely hot.
z When you leave the removed bulb for a long time, the
bulb performance decreases due to lens and reflector
dusting (dirty and dark). Perform the bulb replacement
after preparing a new bulb.
z When installing the bulb, securely fasten the resin cap to
assure water resistance.
REMOVAL
For details, refer to the “Removal • Installation of Turn Signal Lamp
(front foglamp integrated type)” in EL section.
INSTALLATION
Fog Lamp Mounting Screw

Tightening torque:
2.5 - 3.8 N•m (0.26 - 0.39 kgf-m)
EL-24
ROOM LAMP
Room Lamp
Bulb Replacement
Room lamp: 12 V, 10 W
1. Remove the room lamp lens using a flat-bladed (-) screwdriver.

2. Remove the bulb.
EL-25
MAP LAMP
Map Lamp
Bulb Replacement
Map lamp: Bulb 12 V/3.4 W (2 EA)
BULB REPLACEMENT
1. Remove the lens using a flat-bladed (-) screwdriver.
2. Remove the bulb.
EL-26
TRUNK ROOM LAMP
Trunk Room Lamp
Bulb Replacement
1. Press the tap A to open the lans.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling downwards.
Trunk room lamp: 12 V, 3.4 W
EL-27
COMBINATION METER
Removal • Installation of Combination Meter

RELATED WORKS
z Column cover: Refer to “Steering Column” in “Power Steering”
in ST section.
z Cluster lid A: Refer to “Instrument Assembly” in “Body and Trim”
in BT section.
COMPONENTS DIAGRAM
EL-28
COMBINATION METER
Circuit Diagram
EL-29
COMBINATION METER
Specifications
SPEEDOMETER AND TACHOMETER
Engine Model QG15DE / QG16DE

Speedometer Type Stepper motor
Max. reading 220 km/h
Vehicle speed signal (Input) 42-pulse at ABS unit (vehicle with ABS)
8-pulse at vehicle speed sensor (vehicle without ABS)
Vehicle speed signal (Output) 2-pulse (Single wave signal), 8-pulse (vehicle without ABS)
Tachometer Type Stepper motor
Max. reading 8,000 RPM
Red zone 6,600 - 8,000 RPM
Revolution signal (Single wave signal) 2-pulse/revolution
FUEL LEVEL GAGE • COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAGE
Item Specifications
Fuel level Type Stepper motor
gage Needle position E 1/4 1/2 3/4 F
Fuel in the tank (L)/ +3 +1 +0 +0 +0
Approx. 5.5/80 Approx. 15/55.5 Approx. 26/33 Approx. 37/18 Approx. 52/6
Resistance (Ω) 0 -2 5 2 5
Fuel level when low fuel level

Approx. 9
warning light is ON (L)
Coolant Type Stepper motor
tempera- Needle position C Center - H
ture gage Engine coolant temperatur (°C) Approx. 50 Approx. 70 - 105 Approx. 119 Approx. 130
Resistance (Ω) Approx. 405 Approx. 142.5 - 65.3 45.2 32.5
EL-30
COMBINATION METER - GAGE
Component Inspection
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
z Send the engine coolant temperature value detected by the
engine ECM to the meter using the CAN communication line.
z Remove the engine coolant temperature sensor and check as
indicated in the figure.
Resistance
Ω
When the temperature is 20°C: Approx. 2.5 kΩ
Ω
When the temperature is 80°C: Approx. 0.3 kΩ
CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Meta Terminal ECM Terminal Measured Measured

No. No. condition value
QG 15: 7 /
37 Check continuity
QG 16: 94
between Approx. 0 Ω
QG 15: 6 /
39 terminals
QG 16: 86
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR

z Detect the vehicle speed with the signal of the vehicle speed
sensor if the vehicle is not equipped with ABS.
z Remove the vehicle speed sensor from the vehicle.
z Measure the vehicle speed sensor voltage and resistance.
Terminal No. Condition Voltage (V) Resistance (Ω)
Rotate the
Approx. 0 - 5 -
1-2 sensor with hand
- - Approx. 180 - 250
z The ABS control unit detects the wheel speed sensor signal
and sends it to the meter if the vehicle is equipped with ABS.
Meta Terminal ABS control unit Measured
Measured value
No. terminal No. condition
Check continuity
7 23 Approx. 0 Ω
between terminals
FUEL LEVEL GAGE UNIT (SENSOR SIDE)

z Remove the fuel level gage unit from the vehicle.
z Make flat the gage flange.
z Measure the gage resistance by locating fuel level gage to
full, 1/2 and empty.
Terminal No. Float position Resistance
3 5 Full (1) Approx. 160.3 Approx. 6
1/2 (2) Approx. 97.5 Approx. 33
Empty (3) Approx. 32 Approx. 80
EL-31
COMBINATION METER - WARNING LIGHT
Warning Light
Component Inspection
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Check the continuity between the oil pressure switch and body
ground.
Oil Pressure (kgf/cm 2) Continuity

While engine stopped Under 0.02 - 0.029 Yes
(0.2 - 0.3)
While engine running More than 0.02 - 0.029 No
(0.2 - 0.3)
EL-32
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Power Window System
System - General
TIMER FUNCTION
z The timer function allows the driver’s power window operation for about 30 seconds after the key switch
has been turned off. But when the driver’s door changes from open (door switch ON) to closed (door
switch OFF) or key switch changes from OFF to ON, the timer is reset.
OPERATING CONDITIONS
z When driver’s door glass is not in fully closed position (limit switch ON).
z Operation when the key switch is ON.
z Operation when key switch is other than ON (during timer operation).
WHEN OPERATING POWER WINDOW

All the window switches except the driver’s window switch become inoperative if operating the power win-
dow lock switch.
Anti-Pinch Function
The anti-pinch function enables a window to automatically reverse when something is caught in the window
as it is closing. When the control unit detects an obstacle, the window will be lowered 150 mm down
immediately.
CAUTION:
z The anti-pinch function may be activativated if an impact or load is given to window glass by
environment or weather condition.
z Reset the system after performing the followings:
Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator assembly.
z When driver’s door glass is not in fully closed position.
z Window up operation (automatic) when the ignition switch is ON.
z Window up operation when ignition switch is other than ON (during timer operation).
EL-33
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Components Location
EL-34
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Circuit Diagram
EL-35
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Power Window Main Switch Input/Output Signal Standards

Terminal Measurement
Signal Standard value (V)
No. Key switch Operation or conditions
11 Battery power - - Approx. 12
16 Passenger power ON Power window lock Main switch right rear seat Approx. 12
window UP signal switch OFF operation switch DOWN operation
(Switch ON) (Motor operating)
Main switch passenger switch Approx. 0
DOWN operation
(Motor operating)
Power window lock Main switch passenger switch Approx. 12
switch ON operation UP operation
(Switch OFF) (Motor not operating)
DOWN operation
(Motor not operating)
Other than the conditions above Approx. 0
12 Passenger power ON Power window lock Main switch right rear seat Approx. 12
window DOWN signal switch OFF operation switch DOWN operation
UP operation
(Motor operating)
Power window lock Main switch passenger switch Approx. 12
switch ON operation DOWN operation
DOWN operation
4 Driver power window ON or other than ON During UP operation: Other than Approx. 12
motor UP signal (During timer operation) the above
During DOWN operation: Other Approx. 0
than the above
15 Driver power window ON or other than ON During UP operation: Other than Approx. 12
motor DOWN signal (During timer operation) the above
During DOWN operation: Other Approx. 0
than the above
7 Right rear seat ON Power window lock Main switch right rear seat Approx. 12
Main switch right rear seat Approx. 0
switch DOWN operation
(Motor operating)
Power window lock Main switch left rear seat Approx. 12

switch ON operation switch UP operation
Main switch left rear seat Approx. 12
EL-36
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
5 Right rear seat ON Power window lock Main switch right rear seat Approx. 12
Main switch right rear seat Approx. 0
switch UP operation
(Motor operating)
switch ON operation switch DOWN operation
switch UP operation
20 Power window relay ON Refer to the “Operation Conditions” in the “System -
operation signal Description”.
10 Power for passenger ON - Approx. 12
and rear seats power
window switch
1 Rear left seat power ON Power window lock Main switch right rear seat Approx. 12
(Motor operating)
switch ON operation switch UP operation
3 Rear left seat power ON Power window lock Main switch right rear seat Approx. 12
switch UP operation
Power window lock Main switch right rear seat Approx. 12
switch ON operation switch DOWN operation
(Switch OFF) (Motor operating)
switch UP operation
6 Ground - Approx. 0
EL-37
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Each Power Window Switch Input/Output Signal Standards

1 Power of the power ON - Approx. 12
window switch
4 Power window motor ON DOWN operation Approx. 12
DOWN signal UP operation Approx. 0
Other than above Approx. 0
2 Power window UP ON Power window lock Power window switch UP Approx. 0
signal switch OFF operation operation (Motor operating)
(Switch ON) Power window switch DOWN Approx. 0
operation (Motor operating)
Power window lock Power window switch UP Approx. 12
switch ON operation operation (Motor not operating)
(Switch OFF) Power window switch DOWN Approx. 12
operation (Motor not operating)
5 Power window motor ON DOWN operation Approx. 12
DOWN signal UP operation Approx. 0
Other than above Approx. 0
3 Power window ON Power window lock Power window switch UP Approx. 0
DOWN signal switch OFF operation operation (Motor operating)
(Switch ON) Power window switch DOWN Approx. 0
operation (Motor operating)
Power window lock Power window switch UP Approx. 12
switch ON operation operation (Motor not operating)
(Switch OFF) Power window switch DOWN Approx. 12
operation (Motor not operating)
EL-38
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnosis by Symptoms

Inspect if the other systems that use the signals as follows is operating properly.
Symptom Defective system Possible cause

The timer function does not stop by Driver’s door switch route z Defective harness or connection
the driver’s door switch ON/OFF z Defective harness between the
operation driver’s door switch and power
window switch
Power window main switch inside z Defect power window main switch
The driver’s door glass does not Door glass main operation z Foreign material stuck at the glass
reverse the operation at the full close or glass run rubber
position z Wear or deformation of glass run
rubber
z Overly depressed or protruded
vehicle’s chassis
The driver’s door glass reverses the Door glass main operation z Foreign material stuck at the glass
operation during UP operation or glass run rubber
z Wear or deformation of glass run
rubber
vehicle’s chassis
The driver’s door glass reverses the Door glass main operation z Foreign material stuck at the glass
operation at situations other than the or glass run rubber
above z Wear or deformation of glass run
rubber
vehicle’s chassis
EL-39
DOOR LOCK INDICATOR
Door Lock Indicator

BASIC OPERATION (ON)
z There is a red ( ) lock mark on the door lock/unlock switch
and it turns on when the door lock/unlock function is operated.
z The red door lock indicator comes on to notify tha the doors
are in the lock condition when the ignition key is in the “ON”
position and all the doors are locked.
EL-40
REMOTE CONTROLLER
Remote Controller
CAUTION:
z If a remote controller is lost, the ID code of the lost remote controller must be erased to prevent
unauthorized use. However, when the ID code of a lost remote controller is not known, all
controller ID codes should be erased. To erase all ID codes in memory, register one ID code
(remote controller) four times. After all ID codes are erased, the ID codes of all remaining and/
or new remote controllers must be re-registered.
z When registering an additional remote controller, the existing ID codes in memory may or may
not be erased. If four ID codes are stored in memory, when an additional code is registered,
only the oldest code is erased. If less than four ID codes are stored in memory, when an addi-
tional ID code is registered, the new ID code is added and no ID codes are erased. If you need
to activate more than two additional new remote controllers, repeat the procedure “Additional
ID code entry” for each new remote controllers.
Entry of maximum four ID codes is allowed. When more than four ID codes are entered, the
oldest ID code will be erased.
z Even if same ID code that is already in the memory is input, the same ID code can be entered.
The code is counted as an additional code.
Remote Controller Inspection

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF KEY INTEGRATED REMOTE
CONTROLLER
1. Remove case mounting screw.
2. Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver into slot A and pry off the case.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to touch the printed circuits directly.
3. Replace the battery.

z Remove the battery from the lower case and replace it.
CAUTION:
When replacing battery, be sure to keep dirt, grease, and
other foreign materials off the electrode contact area.
4. Assemble the separated case halves and tighten the screws.

After replacing components, check to make sure all remote
controller functions work normally.
REMOTE CONTROLLER BATTERY INSPECTION

Check voltage by connecting a resistance (approximately 300 )
so that the current value becomes about 10 mA.
Judgement standard (Approx.):

Approx. 2.5 V - Approx. 3.0 V
EL-41
OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Outside Rearview Mirror
Timer Function
The operation of mirrors can be continued for 30 seconds even
after turning the ignition key switch to “OFF” position with the
power mirror timer function.
The power supplies to the mirror switch by operating the mirror
relay when the ignition key switch is “OFF”.
Precautions in Handling Electrical Folding Mirror

z Do not attempt to fold the power folding mirror manually. If
have to, always fold it until it clicks to the folded position.
(When the mirror is unfolded to its original position by hand,
there may be vibration during driving, chattering or no folding
operation.)
CAUTION:
z Do not fold the mirror assembly towards the front too
much, it may brake.
z When folding the mirror with mirror folding switch, a
“click” may be heard. This is not a malfunction.
z The left and right rearview mirrors are installed in little
different positions from the center of the vehicle. The right
mirror folds a little slower than the left mirror.
z When the mirror is folded towards vehicle front by hand
and press the folding switch towards opening direction,
the mirror body moves towards vehicle front but it is not
a malfunction. Fold the mirrors all the way (towards rear
of the vehicle) with the switch.
z The power folding mirror sometimes may not operate it
the switch is operated over 5 times consecutively (to pre-
vent from overheating). Let the system cool for about 5
minutes and it will come back normal.
EL-42
DIGITAL CLOCK
Digital Clock
Clock Adjustment
z To adjust the hour, press the “H” adjusting button. To adjust
the minutes, press the “M” button.
Removal • Installation of Clock

REMOVAL
1. Remove the clluster lid D (refer to BT section).
2. Remove screws (2) and remove the clock.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
EL-43
HORN
Horn
REMOVAL
1. Remove the radiator grille.
2. Remove the horn mounting nuts.
CAUTION:
Use FT bolts for horn installation.
INSTALLATION
Horn mounting nut

Tightening torque:
15.7 - 18.6 N•m (1.6 - 1.9 kgf•m)
EL-44
CIGARETTE LIGHTER / POWER SOCKET
Cigarette Lighter
REMOVAL
1. Remove the A/T finisher or M/T finisher. Refer to “Instrument
Assembly” in “Body and Trim” (BT section).
2. Release the screws (2 EA) that holds the cluster lid C lower.
Remove the cluster lid C lower.
3. Pull out the cigarette lighter.
4. Push the cigarette lighter socket from the back of the cluster
lid C lower and remove.
5. Remove the cigarette lighter ring.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
z To install, align the cigarette lighter ring with open ends
of the cluster lid C lower.
Power Socket
REMOVAL
Open the power socket cap and remove the power socket by press-
ing the power socket ring’s groove using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
INSTALLATION
EL-45
TRUNK LID OPENER
Trunk Lid Opener
Operation
z When pressing the trunk open button in the remote controller,
the remote keyless entry receiver detects the signal and sends
it to BCM (meter integrated). Then, the trunk lid opener actua-
tor is operated by the BCM signal.
z There is an phosphorescent emergency release lever to re-
lease the trunk lid lock inside the trunk.
REMOVAL
1. Remove the cover of the trunk lid opener using a flat bladed
screwdriver.
2. Remove both bolts and then remove the trunk lid opener
actuator.
3. Disconnect the connected harness connector.
INSTALLATION
Trunk lid opener mounting bolt
Tightening torque :
5.8 N•m(0.59kg•m)
EL-46
Front Wiper • Washer System
System - General
FRONT WIPER INTERMITTENT OPERATION
The intermittent operation can set the wiper motor to operate the
wiper arm within the intervals 2 to 13 seconds. It is controlled by
the wiper amp in the wiper switch and when the wiper switch is at
INT, ground is supplied to the wiper amp. The operation interval is
controlled by the signal transmitted to the wiper amp from the
wiper volume switch in the wiper switch.
COMPONENTS LOCATION
EL-47
FRONT WIPER AMP INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL STANDARDS

Measurement
Terminal No. Signal Standard value (V)
Key switch Operation
13 Wiper motor position ON Wiper switch: LO position
detect signal
16 Wiper motor HI signal ON Wiper switch OFF Approx. 12

HI Approx. 0
14 Wiper motor LO signal ON Wiper switch OFF Approx. 12
LO Approx. 0
17 Ground ON - Approx. 0
18 Washer operation detect ON Washer motor OFF Approx. 0
signal Washer motor ON Approx. 12
20 Ignition power ON - Approx. 12
EL-48
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
SECTION AT
CONTENTS
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM
Shift Control System .................................................. 2

Removal • Installation of Control Device ................ 3
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Shift Lock System ...................................................... 4
COMPONENTS
Components Location ................................................ 5
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Trouble Diagnosis ...................................................... 6

Shift Control System
Removal • Installation of Control Device
1 Shift lever 9 Housing assembly 17 Location bolt

2 Yoke assembly 10 Bulb assembly 18 Damper gate
3 Cable bracket assembly 11 Bulb box 19 Manual release lever
4 E-ring 12 P-N stopper lock pin 20 Plate position
5 Slide bush 13 P-N stopper damper 21 Slide
6 Center pivet pin 14 P-N stopper 22 E-ring
7 Detention plunger assembly 15 Dust cover 23 O/D switch mounting bracket
8 Detention plunger spring 16 Solenoid assembly 24 Switch/Wire/Connector assembly
AT-2
Removal • Installation of Control Cable
1 Step pin 5 Manual lever 8 Cable bracket

2 Washer 6 Lock plate 9 Cable mounting
3 Bushing 7 Cable mounting bracket 10 Auto device
4 Sleeve
AT-3
SHIFT LOCK FUNCTION
Shift Lock Function
Layout
P position
detection switch
Meter Shift solenoid
Stop lamp switch
1. P-Lock function
If the brake pedal is not depressed with the ignition ON, the gear selector lever cannot be moved to any
other positions from “P”.
2. N-Lock function
When the vehicle speed exceeds 14 km/h, the gear selector lever cannot be moved to “R” from “N”
position. When the vehicle speed goes down below 8 km/h, it can be moved to “R” position.
3. 3-minute timer function

The gear selector lever can be moved to “P” from “N” position within 3 minutes after turning the ignition
switch to “OFF” position.
CAUTION
z “N” position includes “N”, “D”, “3”, “2”, and “1” positions.
AT-4
COMPONENTS
Components Location
AT-5
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Trouble Diagnosis
Diagnosis Tools
No. Vehicle type Item Diagnosis tool
1 CF JATCO 4-speed TCM Mr.Tech & CLIP
2 CF AIRBAG ACU3 Mr.Tech & CLIP
3 CF SIEMENS QG15 ECM Mr.Tech & CLIP
4 CF QG16 ECM Mr.Tech & CLIP
5 CF METER CLIP
6 CF ABS BOSCH 8.0 CLIP
7 CF K9K DIESEL ECM CLIP
8 CF PARKING AID CLIP
9 CF CAN Topology CLIP
10 CF IMMO_CF CLIP
11 CF VIN Related Mr.Tech
AT-6
BRAKE SYSTEM
SECTION BR
CONTENTS
VACUUM TYPE BRAKE BOOSTER
On-Vehicle Inspection and Service ......................... 2

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Components Location ................................................ 4

Trouble Diagnosis ...................................................... 6
Vacuum Type Brake Booster
On-Vehicle Inspection and Service
OPERATION INSPECTION
While engine stopped, depress the brake pedal several times in 5
seconds interval until the vacuum pressure becomes the atmo-
spheric pressure conditions. Start the engine while brake pedal
fully depressed and inspect if the brake pedal lowers when the
vacuum pressure becomes standard value.
AIR INSPECTION
z Apply vacuum pressure to the booster by running the engine
in idle for about 1 minute. Stop the engine and inspect if the
pedal travel increases as depressing the brake pedal once,
twice and tree times in 5 seconds interval.
z Depress the brake pedal while engine running. Then stop the
engine while depressing the brake pedal. The pedal should not
move at least 30 seconds.
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
z Be careful not to deform or bend the brake tube while
removing the brake booster.
z Replace the clevis pin if defective.
z Be careful not to damage the brake booster stud bolt
threads. If installed abnormally, the threads can be dam-
aged in the dash panel.
z Be careful of the check valve directions.
1. Remove the vacuum pipe from the brake booster.
BR-2
2. Remove the master cylinder.

3. Remove the clevis pin and snap pin from the vehicle interior
and remove the input rod from the brake pedal.
4. Remove the mounting nuts from the brake booster and brake
pedal.
5. Remove the booster assembly from the engine room.
OUTPUT ROD LENGTH INSPECTION
1. Apply -66.7 kPa (-500 mmHg) of vacuum pressure to the
booster using a vacuum handy pump.
2. Install the output rod gage (special tool) to the master cylin-
der and rotate the screw until the gage end touches the pri-
mary piston.
3. Secure the A part so that the clearance between the output
rod and screw becomes 0 by reversing the output rod gage
(special tool). Then adjust from B part.
Reference value when vacuum pressure is -500 mmHg:
10.4 mm
INSTALLATION
1. Adjust the input rod length by loosening the lock nut so that
the value B in the illustration becomes the standard value.
Standard value B: 127 mm
2. After adjusting the value B, insert the lock nut and install the
booster assembly to the vehicle.
3. Connect the brake pedal and clevis on the input rod.
4. Install the pedal assembly mounting nut and tighten to the
specified torque.
5. Install the master cylinder to the booster assembly.
6. Adjust the brake pedal height and free play.
7. Tighten the input rod lock nut to the specified torque.
8. Perform the air bleeding. Refer to “Air Bleeding” (BR-8).
BR-3
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Trouble Diagnosis
Components Location
BR-4
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
REMOVAL
Perform by cautioning as below.
CAUTION:
z Start the operation after disconnecting the battery terminal.
z Use the flare nut wrench for brake tube removal and be careful not to damage the flare nut and
brake tube. For installation, tighten to the specified torque using a flare nut torque wrench.
INSTALLATION
Perform by cautioning as below.
z Tighten the mounting bolts and nuts to the specified torque.
z After finishing the operation, perform air bleeding for the brake piping. Refer to “Air Bleeding” (BR-8).
BR-5
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Diagnosis Tools
5 CF METER CLIP
10 CF IMMO_CF CLIP
BR-6
STEERING SYSTEM
SECTION ST
CONTENTS
STEERING WHEE ABS SYSTEM
Installation ................................................................... 2 System Components .................................................. 9
STEERING COLUMN Overview ...................................................................... 1 0
Fail-safe ...................................................................... 1 0
Hydraulic Circuit Diagram ....................................... 1 0
Disassembly • Assembly ........................................... 4
Inspection after Disassembly .................................. 5 HYDRAULIC LINE
POWER STEERING GEAR Removal • Installation .............................................. 11
Air Switch ...................................................................... 6 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SENSOR ROTOR Diagnosis Tools ........................................................ 1 2

WHEEL ROTATION SENSOR
STEERING WHEE
Steering Whee
Remove the steering wheel using a steering wheel puller (special
tool).
Installation
Install in the reverse order of removal by cautioning as below.
REFERENCE:
z When reusing the spiral cable, you can skip the neu-
tral position adjustment work if holding the spiral
cable’s mounting case and turning section with a tape.
z Neutral position (See illustration): Rotate the spiral
cable to the right until getting tight and rotate in re-
verse direction (approx. 3 turns) to align the center-
ing mark and adjust mark. (The spare parts are secured
with a stopper while adjusted in neutral. So just install
on the steering wheel after removing the stopper.)
CAUTION:
z While front wheels aligned straight, install the steer-
ing wheel by placing the cancel craw R mark downwards
and aligning the 3 boss locations and the steering
wheel assembly’s rear 3 holes for steering wheel
installation. Also, check if the spiral cable is at neutral
position and install the steering wheel while the spi-
ral cable locate pin in the left matches with the steer-
ing wheel assembly’s behind locate hole.
z Do not turn the spiral cable unnecessarily. Also do not
rotate excessively over its resistance (Cable may be
damaged).
z After installation, check the normal operation of the
system using airbag warning light.
z If the airbag warning light indicates defective, delete
the stored memory using Mr. Tech.
z If airbag warning light is still on after the above
procedure, diagnose the system and repair the defec-
tive part.
ST-2
STEERING COLUMN
Steering Column
CAUTION:
z Be careful not to exert any impact to the steering column assembly perpendicularly during
removal/installation.
ROD JOINT AND HOLE COVER REMOVAL

1. Lift up the vehicle in the straight ahead position.
2. Put the alignment mark on the lower joint and steering gear with paint and remove the pin bolt under the
lower joint.
3. Remove the lower cover on the upper lower joint, mounting bolts and nuts.
4. Remove the hole cover and lower joint from the vehicle.
5. Remove the clamp and lower seal cover from the hole cover.
LOWER JOINT AND HOLE COVER INSTALLATION

z Refer to the components diagram for tightening torque and install in the reverse order of removal.
z When installing the lower joint to the steering gear, check if the guide chip is in the pictured location
and install it by adjusting the lower joint bottom’s curved position (slit) with the guide chip protrusion.
STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY REMOVAL

1. Remove the steering wheel and column cover. Refer to “Steering Wheel Removal” (ST-6).
2. Remove the instrument lower driver panel.
3. Remove the spiral cable. Refer to “Spiral Cable Removal” (RS-16).
ST-3
STEERING COLUMN
4. Remove the lower cover, mounting bolts and nuts from upper lower joint.
5. Remove the clamp and connector from the steering column assembly.
6. Remove the steering column assembly mounting nut and remove the steering column assembly from the
vehicle.
CAUTION:
z Do not deform the steering column assembly lower bracket during removal.
STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION

z Perform installation while the steering lock is released.
1. Insert the upper of the lower joint to the steering column assembly and install the steering column
assembly to the vehicle using mounting nuts.
2. Install the lower cover, mounting bolts and nuts on the upper of the lower joint.
CAUTION:
z The mounting nut cannot be reused. Do not reuse.
3. Install the clamp and connector.

4. Install the spiral cable. Refer to “Spiral Cable Installation” (RS-16) in “RS Restraint System”.
5. Install the instrument lower driver panel.
6. Install the steering wheel and column cover. Refer to “Steering Wheel Installation” (ST-7).
CAUTION:
z After installation, rotate the steering wheel and inspect if the steering wheel is rotating smoothly
without any twisting, clogging, noises or too much steering efforts.
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove the combination switch from the jacket tube.
ST-4
STEERING COLUMN
2. Remove the mounting nut from the jacket tube and column
shaft and remove the column shaft from the jacket tube.
3. Remove the spring from the mount assembly.
4. Remove the mounting nut and adjust stopper.
5. Remove the steering adjust bolt and remove the tilt lever stop-
per and tilt lever.
Inspection after Disassembly

z If the steering wheel does not rotate properly, then replace the
defective component as follows.
1. Inspect the column shaft bearing for any damages or defects.

If defective, apply the grease or replace the column shaft if
necessary.
2. Inspect the jacket tube for any deformation or damages and
replace if defective.
z If minor shock was exerted to the vehicle, inspect the length
L as shown in the illustration. If out of the standard value,
replace the steering column as an assembly.
Length L: 543 mm
ASSEMBLY
z Refer to the components diagram for tightening torque and
assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
z After assembling the steering column and inspect the tilting
device.
ST-5
POWER STEERING GEAR
Power Steering Gear
Air Switch
z During steering, it intakes auxiliary air to perform the RPM
compensation according to initial steering amount.
ST-6
SENSOR ROTOR
Sensor Rotor
REMOVAL
Front
1. Remove the drive shaft. Refer to [FA] section.
2. Remove the sensor rotor from drive shaft. Refer to [FA] section.
Rear
Detach the wheel hub and remove the sensor rotor. Refer to [RA] section.
INSTALLATION
Front
1. Install the sensor rotor to drive shaft. Refer to [FA] section.
2. Install the drive shaft. Refer to [FA] section.
Rear
Install the sensor rotor and wheel hub. Refer to [RA] section.
CAUTION
z Be careful not to damage the gear teeth on sensor and rotor. When installing the front and rear
wheel hubs, install the wheel rotation sensor first to prevent the sensor sticking due to the
damage of wiring harness.
z When removing the sensor, do not rotate it and do not pull out the wiring harness.
z Make sure that there is no any foreign materials on the pickup area, sensor mounting hole, and
rotor mounting surface. Tighten the nuts and bolts with the specified tightening torque.
ST-7
WHEEL ROTATION SENSOR
Wheel Rotation Sensor
ST-8
ABS SYSTEM
ABS System
System Components
ST-9
ABS SYSTEM
Overview
SYSTEM LAYOUT
Fail-safe
If the ABS system is defective, the ABS control stops with ABS warning lamp OFF and the vehicle uses the
conventional brake system.
Hydraulic Circuit Diagram
ST-10
HYDRAULIC LINE
Hydraulic Line
ST-11
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Trouble Diagnosis
Diagnosis Tools
5 CF METER CLIP
10 CF IMMO_CF CLIP
ST-12
BODY AND TRIM
SECTION BT
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS AND PREPARATION FENDER PROTECTOR
Precautions .................................................................. 3 Removal • Installation ............................................. 2 4

Special Service Tools ................................................ 4
WINDSHIELD MOLDING
WINDSHIELD GLASS • WINDSHIELD MOLDING Removal • Installation ............................................. 2 5
Removal • Installation ............................................... 5
DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING
REAR WINDOW GLASS • REAR WINDOW MOLDING Removal • Installation ............................................. 2 6
Removal • Installation ............................................... 9
SIDE GUARD MOLDING
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Removal • Installation ............................................. 2 7
Removal • Installation ............................................. 1 2
FRONT BUMPER COVER
REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Removal • Installation ............................................. 2 8
HEADLAMP/TURN SIGNAL LAMP
DOOR MIRROR Removal • Installation ............................................. 2 9
REAR COMBINATION/REAR FOG LAMP
Disassembly • Assembly ....................................... 1 7
INSIDE MIRROR
REAR MUD GUARD
FRONT BUMPER
DOOR TRIM
REAR BUMPER
BODY SIDE TRIM
FRONT GRILLE
REAR PARTIAL SELF FINISHER
COWL TOP
FLOOR TRIM
CONTENTS
HEAD LINING
TRUNK TRIM AND TRUNK LID TRIM
INSTRUMENT ASSEMBLY
Components Diagram ............................................. 4 0

FRONT SEAT

Removal • Installation of Front Seat Assembly ... 4 8
Removal • Installation of Front Seat ...................... 4 9
Disassembly • Assembly of Seatback .................. 4 9
REAR SEAT
HOOD
Assembly Dimension Adjustment ......................... 5 3

Removal • Installation of Hood Assembly ............ 5 4
Removal • Installation of Hood Lock Control ...... 5 5
Hood Lock Control Inspection ............................... 5 6
DOOR
Door Assembly Dimension Adjustment ............... 5 7

FRONT DOOR LOCK

REAR DOOR LOCK

TRUNK LID
Assembly Dimension Adjustment ......................... 6 4

Removal • Installation of Trunk Lid Assembly .... 6 5
Removal • Installation of Torsion Bar ................... 6 6
Removal • Installation of Trunk Lid Welt Strip .... 6 7
TRUNK LID & FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
Components Location ............................................. 6 8

Precautions
CAUTION:
z To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or
death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must
be performed by an authorized RENAULT SAMSUNG dealer.
z Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, and disconnect both battery cables. Then
wait at least 3 minutes. (This is to discharge all the remaining electricity in the airbag sensor
unit’s auxiliary power circuit.)
and pretensioner seatbelt circuit while installed unless instructed to in this Service Manual.
z Do not leave SRSairbag unit and pre-tensioner seat belt related components in the place where
the temperature is above 80°C.
Sealant and Primer Handing

z Use the sealant less than 6 months from the manufacturing date.
z Store the primer and sealant in cool and shaded area.
z Open the primer and sealant container right before using it. Do not reuse the remaining.
z Always shake the primer container before using it. Do not use it if foreign particles are floating on.
z If primer or sealant touches the skin, quickly wipe out with white gasoline and clean with soap.
z In addition to above cautions, always follow the instructions on the container.
Caution in Service
z Be careful not to damage or deform the components during removal and disassembly. Protect the com-
ponents that interfere with the other components in service with cloth.
z Protect the components by covering with a cloth or vinyl tape when removing the components using a
screwdriver (When removing the components that are engaged each other).
z Store the removed components safely with a cloth.
z Replace the clip if deformed or damaged.
z For the components that are not allowed reuse, always replace them with new if removed.
z Tighten the bolts and nuts to the specified torque.
z After assembling, check if every component operates properly.
z Remove the dirt as follows:
- If watersoluble: Clean the polluted are with cloth dampened in warm water and wipe out with a soft dry cloth.
- If oilsoluble: Clean the polluted are with cloth dampened in warm water with mild soap (2 - 3 % of
concentration). Remove the soap with cloth dampened in clean water and then wipe out with a soft
dry cloth.
z Do not use any organic detergent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol and gasoline.
BT-3
Preparations
Special Service Tools
Item Description
09881-41010 Assembling front rear seat hug ring

Hug ring pliers
BT-4
WINDSHIELD GLASS • WINDSHIELD MOLDING
Windshield Glass • Windshield Molding
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front pillar garnish and head lining front end.
2. Remove the front pillar weatherstrip.
3. Remove the windshield side molding.
4. Remove the cowl top cover.
5. Put the protector tape around the windshield glass to prevent
from scratching the body surface.
6. Cut the molding surface using a cutter knife following the glass
line.
7. Pull out and completely remove the molding remaining at the

body flange using pliers.
z When reusing the windshield glass, put an alignment mark
on the body and the glass.
8. Cut the sealant.
z Perform as below according to using tools.
CAUTION:
z When reusing the windshield glass, do not use the wind-
shield knife. (Glass may be damaged.)
BT-5
a. When using the windshield knife (When replacing the glass)

i. Apply some soap solution on the body side sealant for easy
windshield knife operation.
ii. Insert the windshield knife into the sealant and adjust the
knife parallel to the glass and cut the sealant by pulling the
knife.
b. When using the piano cord (When reusing the glass)

i. Perforate a hole using a gimlet or cutter to the glass seal-
ant from the inside of the vehicle.
ii. Insert the piano cord into the hole from the inside of the
vehicle and connect the both cord ends with screwdrivers.
iii. By pulling the both ends of the piano cord (one inside and
one outside of the vehicle), cut the sealant following the
glass line.
CAUTION:
z Strongly contact the piano cord onto the glass edge.
z Insert copper plates to prevent the piano cord from touch-
ing the instrument panel.
9. Using the glass holder (special tool), remove the glass from
the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. Cut the remaining sealant evenly leaving the 2 mm thickness
using a knife.
CAUTION:
z When the body side is damaged, always repair with 2-
fluid type urethane paint. Do not use the lacquer paint.
BT-6
2. Put the clip to the clip holes on the vehicle.

3. For new glass installation, place the glass onto the vehicle,
mark the alignment marks on the body and the glass and re-
move the glass again.
4. For the reused glass, cut the remainder evenly with a knife.
5. Wipe out the glass’s sealant surfaces and upper molding in-
stallation surface with white gasoline.
6. Stick the dam rubber on the glass as shown in the illustration

by centering center below point.
7. Apply the primer.
REFERENCE:
z The primer is very important since it strengthens the seal-
ing effect between the glass and the body surface.
CAUTION:
z There are 2 types of primers. Be careful not to confuse
between the two.
Primer M: For body surface.

Primer G: For glass.
Apply the primer G around the glass following the instructions.
8. Apply the primer M on the vehicle surface.

CAUTION:
z When primer M stains on the body surface besides the
sealant surface, quickly wipe it out with white gasoline.
z Insert copper plates to prevent the primer M from touch-
9. Apply the primer and apply the sealant around the glass within
the instructed time on the user’s guide.
z Cut the sealant nozzle end and open it. Then apply with a
sealant gun.
10. Install the glass holder (special tool) to the glass and install
the glass to the vehicle by mating the alignment marks on the
body and the glass.
11. Press the glass lightly and completely seat the glass.
12. Make the glass even by removing the slipped out sealant or
adding sealant where lacks.
BT-7
13. Determine the upper molding position and insert and fix the
bottom of the molding to the glass.
CAUTION:
z Perform the windshield molding installation before the
sealant hardens.
z Leave the door glass open until the sealant hardens after
installing the glass. Do not drive.
14. Inspect for any water leakage.

15. Remove the protector tape.
16. Install the removed components.
BT-8
REAR WINDOW GLASS • REAR WINDOW MOLDING
Rear Window Glass • Rear Window Molding
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear part of the head lining.
2. Remove the rear pillar garnish and rear partial self finisher.
3. Remove the rear defogger and glass antenna connector.
4. P u t t h e p r o t e c t o r t a p e a r o u n d t h e r e a r w i n d o w g l a s s
(molding) not to scratch the body surface.
5. Cut the rear window molding using a cutter knife following

the glass line.
6. Pull out and completely remove the molding remaining at
the body flange.
z When reusing the rear window glass, put an alignment
marks on the body and the glass.
7. Cut the sealant.

z Cut the 2 upper clips with sealant.
z Perform as below according to using tools.
CAUTION:
z When reusing the rear window glass, do not use the
windshield knife. (Glass may be damaged.)
BT-9
REAR WINDOW GLASS AND REAR WINDOW MOLDING
a. When using the windshield knife (When replacing the glass)

i. Apply some soap solution on the body side sealant for easy
windshield knife operation.
ii. Insert the windshield knife into the sealant and adjust the
knife parallel to the glass and cut the sealant by pulling the
knife.
b. When using the piano cord (When reusing the glass)

i. Perforate a hole using a gimlet or cutter to the glass seal-
ant from the inside of the vehicle.
ii. Insert the piano cord into the hole from the inside of the
vehicle and connect the both cord ends with screwdrivers.
iii. By pulling the both ends of the piano cord (one inside and
one outside of the vehicle), cut the sealant following the
glass line.
CAUTION:
z Strongly contact the piano cord onto the glass edge.
z Insert copper plates to prevent the piano cord from touch-
8. Using the glass holder (special tool), remove the glass from
the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. Cut the remaining sealant evenly leaving the 2 mm thickness
using a knife.
CAUTION:
z When the body side is damaged, always repair with 2-
fluid type urethane paint. Do not use the lacquer paint.
2. For the reused glass, cut the remainder evenly with a knife.
3. Wipe out the glass’s sealant surfaces and surroundings with
white gasoline.
BT-10
REAR WINDOW GLASS AND REAR WINDOW MOLDING
4. Stick the dam rubber on the glass sides as shown in the illus-
tration by centering center upper point.
5. Install the rear window molding to the rear window glass and
fix the glass by pressing the glass with a bamboo piece.
6. Apply the primer.

REFERENCE:
z The primer is very important since it strengthens the seal-
ing effect between the glass and the body surface.
CAUTION:
z There are 2 types of primers. Be careful not to confuse
between the two.
Primer M: For body surface.
Primer G: For glass.
z Apply the primer G around the glass following the instructions.
7. Apply the primer M on the vehicle surface.
CAUTION:
z When primer M stains on the body surface besides the
sealant surface, quickly wipe it out with white gasoline.
8. Apply the primer and apply the sealant around the glass within
the instructed time on the user’s guide.
z Cut the sealant nozzle end and open it. Then apply with a
sealant gun.
9. Install the glass holder (special tool) to the glass and install
the glass to the vehicle by mating the upper clip (2 EA) to the
body holes. When reusing the glass, install the glass to the
vehicle by mating the alignment marks on the body and the
glass.
10. Press the glass lightly and completely seat the glass.
11. Make the glass even by removing the slipped out sealant or
adding sealant where lacks.
CAUTION:
z Leave the door glass open until the sealant hardens after
installing the glass. Do not drive.
12. Inspect for any water leakage.

13. Remove the protector tape.
14. Install the removed components.
BT-11
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Front Door Glass and Regulator
1. Remove the front door finisher.

2. Remove the sealing screen.
REFERENCE:
z When reusing the sealing screen, cut the butyl tape with
a cutter so that the butyl tape remains on the sealing
screen.
3. Operate the power window main switch and adjust the door
glass until can see the carrier plate mounting bolt.
4. Remove the carrier plate mounting bolt.
5. Remove the door glass by lifting from the rear end and pulling
out towards outside from the chassis.
BT-12
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
6. Disconnect the regulator assembly connector.

7. Remove the regulator assembly and guide rail mounting bolts
and pull out through the operation hole.

Inspect the regulator assembly for the below items and replace
or lubricate if defective.
z Wire wear.
z Regulator deformation.
z Lubrication condition on major moving parts.
The arrow in the illustration shows the lubrication points.
ASSEMBLING DIMENSION INSPECTION

z Check if the glass is securely installed into the glass run
groove.
z Check for proper operation by moving the glass up and down.
BT-13
REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Rear Door Glass and Regulator
1. Remove the door outside molding.

2. Remove the rear door finisher.
REFERENCE:
screen.
4. Remove the mounting bolts and remove the lower chassis rear
towards the bottom.
5. Operate the power window main switch and adjust the door
glass until can see the main channel mounting bolts.
6. Remove the main channel mounting bolts.
BT-14
7. Lower the door glass to its bottom and remove the glass from
the partition chassis’s glass run.
8. Insert the glass in the gap between the partition chassis and
door outer panel and remove the glass towards the outside of
the door.
9. Disconnect the regulator assembly connector.
10. Remove the regulator assembly mounting bolts and remove it

through the operation hole.
11. Remove the glass run partition chassis.

12. Remove the partition chassis mounting bolts (lower section)
and screws (upper section).
13. Remove the partition glass.

BT-15

z Inspect the regulator assembly for the below items and re-
place or lubricate if defective.
Gear wear
Regulator deformation
Spring damage
Lubrication condition on major moving parts
z The arrow in the illustration shows the lubrication points.
ASSEMBLING DIMENSION INSPECTION

z Check if the glass is securely installed into the glass run
groove.
z Check for proper operation by moving the glass up and down.
BT-16
DOOR MIRROR
Door Mirror
CAUTION:
z Be careful not to damage the mirror assembly.
1. Remove the corner cover (Remove it from the upper clip section).
2. Disconnect the door mirror harness connector.
3. Remove the door mirror mounting nuts and remove the door mirror assembly.
BT-17
DOOR MIRROR
DISASSEMBLY
1. Fold up mirror.
2. Put a protective tape around the mirror body.
3. Insert a small minus (-) screwdriver into the gap between the
mirror (mirror holder) and mirror holder bracket as in the
illustration. Remove the bottom of the mirror holder by press-
ing and lifting up the mirror holder mounts (2 points).
CAUTION:
z When pressing and lifting the mount, do not lift just one
location too much. Always lift up 2 locations.
ASSEMBLY
1. Position the mirror holder bracket and mirror body assembly
(actuator) horizontal.
2. Install the mirror to the mirror holder bracket by facing the
upper part of the mirror mounts forwards and press in the lower
part of the mirror until clicks to install.
CAUTION:
z Check the lower part of the mirror after assembly and
make sure that the lower mount (2 locations) is securely
installed.
BT-18
INSIDE MIRROR
Inside Mirror
REMOVAL
Push “D” area to removal direction.
INSTALLATION
Install the inside mirror to the windshield bracket placing it verti-
cally to the base surface “B” and assemble the inside mirror by
rotating it 90° to the assembling direction with the force “F” (less
than 147 N).
BT-19
FRONT BUMPER
Front Bumper
1 Front fender (LH) 10 Front bumper bracket (LH) 18 Screws (4 EA)

2 Front fender (RH) 11 Front bumper bracket (RH) 19 Front fascia low grille
3 Bolts (8 EA) 12 Clips (2 EA) 20 Nuts (6 EA)
4 Front bumper stay (LH) 13 Radiator grille 21 Front bumper fascia
5 Front bumper stay (RH) 14 Rivets (4 EA) 22 Fog lamp (LH)
6 Front bumper beam 15 Front bumper side bracket (LH) 23 Fog lamp (RH)
7 Nuts (4 EA) 16 Front bumper side bracket (RH) 24 License plate
8 Front bumper energy absorber 17 Screw grommets (2 EA) 25 Screws (2 EA)
9 Nuts (4 EA)
BT-20
REAR BUMPER
Rear Bumper
1 Long bolt 10 Rear bumper energy absorber (RH) 18 Trim clips (6 EA)
2 Nuts (2 EA) 11 Clip pushes (2 EA) 19 License plate
3 Bolts (2 EA) 12 Rear bumper closing (LH) 20 Clips (4 EA)
4 Rear bumper stay (LH) 13 Rear bumper closing (RH) 21 Screws (2 EA)
5 Rear bumper stay (RH) 14 Screw grommets (2 EA) 22 Screws (2 EA)
6 Bolts (8 EA) 15 Screws (2 EA) 23 Screws (2 EA)
7 Rear bumper beam 16 Rear bumper side bracket (LH) 24 Rear bumper fascia
8 Nuts (4 EA) 17 Rear bumper side bracket (RH) 25 Spring nut (1 EA)
9 Rear bumper energy absorber (LH)
BT-21
FRONT GRILLE
Front Grille
1 Clips (2 EA) 3 Radiator grille assembly 5 Radiator core support

2 Tap screws (4 EA) 4 Screw grommets (4 EA) 6 Front bumper fascia
BT-22
COWL TOP
Cowl Top
(Additional works)
z Remove the wiper arm
z Remove the window shield side molding.
BT-23
FENDER PROTECTOR
Fender Protector
1 Front fender 6 Screws (R/L: 2 EA) 10 Front mud guard

2 Bumper fascia 7 Clips (R/L: 6 EA) 11 Protector chipping
3 Clips (R/L: 2 EA) 8 Clips (R/L: 2 EA) 12 Screw grommets (R/L: 3 EA)
4 Underside cover 9 Screws (R/L: 3 EA) 13 Dash side
5 Fender protector
BT-24
WINDSHIELD MOLDING
Windshield Molding
(Accompanying work)
z Weather strip removal/installation (at windshield molding)
CAUTION:
z The windshield upper molding removal and installation is included in windshield glass assembly.
BT-25
DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING
Door Outside Molding
BT-26
SIDE GUARD MOLDING
Side Guard Molding
BT-27
FRONT BUMPER COVER
Front Bumper Cover
1 Front bumper fascia 4 Front bumper cover

2 Clips (5 EA) 5 Radiator core support
3 Screws (4 EA)
BT-28
HEADLAMP/TURN SIGNAL LAMP
Headlamp/Turn Signal Lamp
1 Nuts (3 EA) 3 Turn signal lamp assembly 5 Headlamp assembly

2 Front fender tape 4 Grommet (1 EA) 6 Screws (3 EA)
BT-29
REAR COMBINATION/REAR FOG LAMP
Rear Combination/Rear Fog Lamp
1 Nuts (4 EA) 4 Grommet (1 EA) 7 Trim clip

2 Nuts (2 EA) 5 Rear combination lamp assembly 8 Screws (2 EA)
3 Rear fog lamp bracket 6 Rear fog lamp assembly (for export) 9 License plate assembly
BT-30
REAR MUD GUARD
Rear Mud Guard
1 Rear bumper closing 4 Tap screws (3 EA) 7 Air draft assembly

2 Trim clips (2 EA) 5 Rear mud guard 8 Rear fender
3 Spring nuts (3 EA) 6 Rear bumper fascia
BT-31
DOOR TRIM
Door Trim
FRONT AND REAR

1. Remove the armrest.
BT-32
DOOR TRIM
2. Remove the power window switch finisher by holding and lift-

ing up the rear end. Disconnect the power window switch
connector.
3. Insert a cloth protected minus (-) screwdriver into the gap at

the center bottom of the inside handle escutcheon and remove
it by disconnecting the 6 connection mounts.
4. Remove the door finisher mounting screws (front door), clip

and the bolt.
5. Insert the hand into the door finisher lower opening, pull out
and remove the clip.
6. Remove the door finisher by pulling upwards.
REFERENCE:
z Insert the clip driver or clip clamping tool into the arrow
location (between the body panel and clip) and remove
the finisher.
CAUTION:
z During finisher installation, check if the clip is securely
inserted into the body panel holes. Then push it in.
BT-33
BODY SIDE TRIM
Body Side Trim
CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH

z Front and rear kicking plate inner removal/installation.
CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH

z Seatbelt shoulder anchor removal/installation.
z Front and rear kicking plate inner and center pillar lower gar-
nish removal/installation.
REAR PILLAR FINISHER

z Rear seat removal/installation.
REAR SEATBACK FINISHER

z Rear seat and rear pillar finisher removal/installation.
CAUTION:
z Insert a cloth protected screwdriver or clip driver into the
arrow location (between the body panel and clip) and
remove the clip.
z During installation, check if the clip is securely inserted
into the chassis panel holes. Then push it in.
BT-34
REAR PARTIAL SELF FINISHER
Rear Partial Self Finisher
(Accompanying works)
z Rear seat removal/installation.
z Rear pillar finisher removal/installation.
z Rear seatbelt floor anchor bolt removal/installation.
BT-35
FLOOR TRIM
Floor Trim
(Accompanying works)
z Front seat and rear seat cushion removal/installation.
z Center console removal/installation.
z Instrument lower cover and instrument lower center panel removal/installation.
z Instrument stay removal/installation.
z Front seatbelt floor anchor bolt removal/installation.
z Front and rear kicking plate inner and body side welt removal/installation.
z Dash side finisher and center pillar lower garnish removal/installation.
BT-36
HEAD LINING
Head Lining
1 Map lamp assembly 5 Sun visor holder (R/L:1EA) 8 Assist clip (R/L:1EA)
2 Tap screws (2 EA) 6 Assist clip (RH) 9 Room lamp
3 Sun visor (R/L:1EA) 7 Headlining 10 Trim clips (3 EA)
4 Tap screws (R/L:1EA)
Tab (top & bottom) (Accompanying works)

z Center pillar garnish removal/installation.
z Body side welt removal/installation.
z Front pillar and rear pillar finisher removal/installation.
(Point) Assist grip
z Using the clip clamping tool, remove the assist grip cover’s
top and bottom mounts. Place it sideways and remove the
screws (each 1 EA left and right).
1. Tilt the head lining and pass the right side through in between
the shift knob and lower cluster lid C.
BT-37
HEAD LINING
2. Remove the head lining from the passenger’s door opening.
CAUTION:
z Two people must work together during removal.
z Place a cloth cover around the instrument assembly to
prevent from scratching.
z Do not excessively bend the head lining.
REFERENCE:
z Insert into the center pillar upper hole during installation.
BT-38
TRUNK TRIM AND TRUNK LID TRIM
Trunk Trim and Trunk Lid Trim
1 Rear seatback welt 6 Trunk carpet support (2 EA) 10 Trim clips (6 EA)
2 Trunk front finisher assembly 7 Trunk rear plate 11 Trunk side finisher (RH)
3 Trim clips (2 EA) 8 Trunk trim clip 12 Trunk lid finisher
4 Trunk net hook (2 EA) 9 Trunk carpet hook (1 EA) 13 Trim clips (15 EA)
5 Trunk side finisher (LH)
BT-39
INSTRUMENT ASSEMBLY
Instrument Assembly
Components Diagram
BT-40
INSTRUMENT ASSEMBLY
WORK LIST
Item Instrument panel Combination meter Display Audio Console
Key cylinder escutcheon [1] [1]
Steering column cover [2] [2]
Light • turn signal switch [3] [3]
Cluster lid A [4] [4]
Combination meter [5] [5]
Instrument lower driver panel [6]
Switch finisher [7]
A/T (M/T) finisher [8] [1] [1]
Cluster lid C lower [9] [2]
Cluster lid C [10] [1] [3]
Console [11] [4] [2]
Audio, A/C controller [12]
Glove box [13]
Instrument lower assist panel [14]
Glove box cover [15]
Instrument lower cover [16]
Instrument center panel [17]
Passenger airbag module [18]
Instrument mask [19]
Front pillar garnish [20]
Instrument panel [21]
KEY CYLINDER ESCUTCHEON

z Remove the key cylinder escutcheon to the outside of the vehicle.
STEERING COLUMN COVER

z Remove the steering column cover (screw: 5 EA).
LIGHT • TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

z Remove the light • turn signal switch (screw: 2 EA).
BT-41
INSTRUMENT ASSEMBLY
CLUSTER LID A
1. Remove the two crews and remove the metal clip by pulling
the cluster lid A forwards.
2. Remove from the right side cautioning with other surrounding
components.
COMBINATION METER
z Remove the 3 screws, disconnect the connector and then re-
move the combination meter.
INSTRUMENT LOWER DRIVER PANEL

1. Remove the fuse box lid.
2. Remove the metal clip by pulling the instrument lower driver
panel forwards after removing the screw.
3. Remove the two screws from the diagnosis connector mount
bracket in the back of the panel.
SWITCH FINISHER
z Pull out and remove the top mounts (2 locations) and discon-
nect all switch connectors.
A/T (M/T) FINISHER

z Remove the ashtray and then pull out the finisher.
BT-42
INSTRUMENT ASSEMBLY
CLUSTER LID C LOWER

1. Remove the two screws.
2. Insert the hand into the top and bottom of the cluster lid C
lower and remove it by pulling it forwards.
AUDIO • A/C CONTROLLER

z Remove the 4 screws and connectors and remove the audio
and A/C controller.
CLUSTER LID C
1. Insert the hand into the lid and pull it forwards.
CAUTION:
z Be careful with the hazard switch, door lock switch and
snow switch harness.
2. Disconnect the hazard switch, door lock switch and snow

switch connectors.
CONSOLE
1. Remove the two screws from the rear of the console.
2. Remove the console center cap and remove the screw (1 EA).
3. Remove the console finisher.
4. Remove the two screws and then remove the console.
GLOVE BOX
z Open the glove box and remove the glove box pin from the
inside.
BT-43
INSTRUMENT ASSEMBLY
INSTRUMENT LOWER ASSIST PANEL

z Remove the 2 screws. Pull it forwards and remove it from the
blower unit lower mount.
GLOVE BOX COVER

1. Remove the 2 screws and glove box striker (screws: 2 EA).
The glove box lamp is installed in all models except for PE
model. When removing the lamp, disconnect the lamp con-
nector first.
2. Pull it forwards and remove the mount from the instrument
panel.
Tab (one at both sides)
INSTRUMENT LOWER COVER

1. Remove the metal clip and resin mount from the driver’s side
and remove by pulling towards the driver’s seat.
2. Remove the wooden mount from the passenger side and re-
move by pulling towards the rear of the vehicle.
INSTRUMENT LOWER CENTER PANEL

1. Remove the 2 screws.
2. Disconnect the power outlet harness connector.
3. Pull the instrument lower center panel forwards and remove it
after removing the metal clip.
BT-44
INSTRUMENT ASSEMBLY
PASSENGER SEAT AIRBAG MODULE

z Remove the special bolt and then remove the passenger side
airbag module.
Refer to “Restraint System”.
INSTRUMENT MASK
z Insert a cloth protected minus (-) screwdriver into the cut por-
tion of the instrument mask end and remove it by releasing the
mount.
FRONT PILLAR GARNISH

z Pull the front pillar garnish forwards and remove it after remov-
ing the metal clip.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Press the A/T device’s key interlock cable slider mount and
push into the casing cap direction , then remove the key inter-
lock rod and adjuster holder.
2. Remove the casing cap from the bracket.
3. Remove the nut and lower down the steering column.

4. Remove the 3 bolts, 2 nuts and 1 screw that holds the instru-
ment panel and remove the instrument panel.
BT-45
INSTRUMENT ASSEMBLY
INSTRUMENT PAD
z Remove the 6 screws from the rear of the instrument panel.
GLOVE BOX
z Remove the 2 screws from the inside of the glove box.
BT-46
FRONT SEAT
Front Seat
Components Diagram
CAUTION:
z Protect the locations that interfere during seat removal with a cloth.
BT-47
FRONT SEAT
Removal • Installation of Front Seat Assembly
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front seat assembly in the order as shown in the
figure.
2. Remove two front bolts fixing the front seat.
3. Remove the inner side seat slide cover and mounting bolts.
4. Remove the outer side seat slide cover and mounting bolts.
INSTALLATION
Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
BT-48
FRONT SEAT
Removal • Installation of Front Seat
Disassembly • Assembly of Seatback
SEATBACK TRIM (WITH SIDE AIRBAG)
1. Remove the seatback finisher.
2. Remove the retainer.
3. Remove the 2 nuts and remove the inner cross mount stay.
4. Press the headrest holder mounts on the headrest stay pipe’s

hole from the rear of the seatback. Remove the stopper and lift
up the headrest to remove.
CAUTION:
z Be careful of the headrest holder directions (left & right
and forwards & rearwards) during installation.
5. Remove the hug ring and separate the pad and trim after re-
moving the seatback.
SEATBACK ASSEMBLY
z To remove the seatback assembly, remove the 4 bolts after
step 1 and 2.
CAUTION:
z During assembling the seatback frame, check the reclin-
ing device’s lock in both sides and insert the bolt and
then tighten.
BT-49
FRONT SEAT
SEATBACK TRIM (VEHICLE WITHOUT SIDE AIRBAG)

1. Remove the retainer from the lower side of the seatback rear.
2. Pry up the trim and remove the retainer from the back and hug
rings from the front.
3. Remove the headrest holder mount by holding and pushing it

up.
CAUTION:
z Be careful of the headrest holder directions (left & right
and forwards & rearwards) during installation.
4. Remove the hug ring and separate the pad and trim after re-
moving the seatback.
SEATBACK ASSEMBLY
z To remove the seatback assembly, remove the 4 bolts after
step 1.
CAUTION:
z During assembling the seatback frame, check the reclin-
ing device’s lock in both sides and insert the bolt and
then tighten.
BT-50
FRONT SEAT
DISASSEMBLY • ASSEMBLY OF SEAT CUSHION TRIM

1. Remove the reclining lever by standing the mount inside and
pushing the knob towards the front.
2. Remove the snap ring by hanging a wire and lifting it up and

then remove the lifter dial.
3. Remove the seat harness and bolts from the rear of the seat
cushion.
CAUTION:
z For bolt installation, check the slide’s lock in both sides
and insert the bolt and then tighten.
4. Remove the retainer on the rear of the cushion.
5. Pry up the trim and remove the hug ring.
BT-51
REAR SEAT
Rear Seat
1 Rear seatback assembly 4 Rear seatback assembly 7 Bolts (4 EA)

(with armrest) (without armrest) 8 Hook
2 Tap screws (2 EA) 5 Screw (R/L:1EA) 9 Tether anchor plate assembly
3 Armrest 6 Rear seat cushion assembly
z Secure the pad side wire and trim side wire using the hug ring.
REFERENCE:
z The hug ring installation is easier if use the hug ring pli-
ers (special tool).
z When installing a new trim, it is easier if put the hug ring
locations by referring the old trim.
BT-52
HOOD
Hood
Assembly Dimension Adjustment
FRONT END HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT, LEFT-RIGHT AND FRONT-REAR GAP ADJUSTMENT

1. Remove the hood lock. Adjust the hood by rotating the bumper rubber so that it becomes 1 ~ 1.5 mm
lower than the fender.
2. Temporarily install the hood lock and determine the position so that the hood lock engages with the
striker. Check if the lock and the striker has any looseness and tighten the lock mounting bolts to the
specified torque.
SURFACE DIFFERENCE (FLUSH) ADJUSTMENT

1. Remove the hood lock. Adjust the bumper rubber left and right so that the surface difference between
the hood and the fender becomes the plant assembling standard.
2. Install the hood lock. Adjust the hood lock left and right so that the striker and the lock center are
perpendicular when viewed from the front.
BT-53
HOOD
3. Check if the secondary latch engages securely with the sec-

ondary striker when drop the hood from 200 mm of height or
press the hood with 3 kg of force.
4. Close the hood. Adjust the hood by moving the hood lock up
and down so that the striker and the lock are securely engaged.
5. After the adjustment, tighten the lock mounting bolt to the
specified torque.
Removal • Installation of Hood Assembly
1. Disconnect the washer hose from the connecting section.

2. Remove the hinge mounting nut from the hood and remove the hood assembly.
BT-54
HOOD
Removal • Installation of Hood Lock Control
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the hood lock cable from the hood lock and re-
move the hood lock cable from the radiator core support upper
and hood latch clip.
2. Remove the dash side finisher. Refer to “Body and Trim” (BT-
32).
3. Remove the mounting screws and remove the hood opener.
4. Remove the grommet from the dash and pull out towards the
inside of the hood lock cable.
CAUTION:
z When removing by pulling, be careful not to damage the
hood lock cable (surface peeling) by the body hole.
BT-55
HOOD
INSTALLATION
1. Push in the hood lock cable with maximum R (over R 100 mm).
2. Check if not escaped from the position determining grommet.
Insert the grommet securely into the panel hole.
3. Apply the sealant on the grommet where marked section.
4. Install the cable securely to the lock.

5. Adjust hood lock after installation and check opener for proper
operation.
Hood Lock Control Inspection

CAUTION:
z Replace the hood lock cable if bent or deformed.
1. Check if the hood lock secondary latch engages securely with
the secondary striker only when drop the hood from 200 mm of
height.
2. Check if the hood end pops up about 20 mm when pull the
hood opener smoothly. Also check if the hood opener returns
to the original position.
3. Inspect the lubrication at the hood lock and apply “body grease”
to the illustrated positions if necessary.
BT-56
DOOR
Door
Door Assembly Dimension Adjustment
Front Door
FORE AND AFT GAP AND FRONT END FLUSH ADJUSTMENT
1. Remove the fender protector.
2. Loosen the body side hinge mounting bolt from inside of the fender. Lift up the rear of the front door and
perform adjustment.
Rear Door
FORE AND AFT GAP AND FRONT END FLUSH ADJUSTMENT
1. Remove the center pillar upper and lower garnish.
2. Loosen the mounting bolt from outside and mounting nuts from inside. Open the rear door and lift up the
rear of the rear door and then perform adjustment.
BT-57
DOOR
STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the striker so that it becomes parallel with the lock engag-
ing direction.
CAUTION:
z While removing/installing the door assembly, secure the
door with a cloth-covered jack to prevent from scratch-
ing the door and the body panels.
z Perform the door assembly dimension adjustment when
removing/installing the door assembly.
z Inspect the lubrication condition at the hinge pivots and main
moving section of the check link. Apply body grease if necessary.
1. Remove the door finisher.
2. Remove the door harness.
3. Remove the mounting bolts and nuts and remove the door assembly.
Install in the reverse order of removal and tighten the mounting bolts
and nuts to the specified torque.
Door Welt Strip
BT-58
FRONT DOOR LOCK
Front Door Lock
Components Diagram
Inspection • Adjustment
REFERENCE:
screen.
Outside Handle Rod Adjustment

Adjust by rotating the bush so that the gap between the bush and
rod becomes as shown in the illustration.
REFERENCE:
z Do not let the gap become 0 mm or rod always be pressed.
REMOVAL
REFERENCE:
screen.
3. Remove the front door glass.
BT-59
FRONT DOOR LOCK
4. Remove the fixing clip and remove the inner pad.
5. Remove the mounting bolts and remove the lower chassis and
rear glass as an assembly from the door panel up to the upper
part of the door panel.
6. Remove the inside handle escutcheon A.
7. Remove the inside handle mounting screws.

8. Disconnect the lock knob rod connections (2 locations) on the
bell crank.
9. Disconnect the inside handle rod (door lock assembly side).
10. Push the inside handle rearwards and remove it from the door
panel hole.
11. Remove the rod from the inside handle.
12. Insert the hand into the work hole and disconnect the key
lock rod and outside handle rod connections (handle side).
13. Remove the connector on the door lock actuator.

14. Remove the mounting screw and remove the door lock as-
sembly from the work hole.
15. Remove the outside handle and key cylinder stay mounting
bolt and remove the outside handle assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
z During door lock assembly installation, apply the anti-
corrosion wax on body side.
z To install the rod, rotate the rod holder until each rod
clicks.
BT-60
FRONT DOOR LOCK
DISASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
z Perform the actuator removal/installation after removing
the door lock assembly from the vehicle.
1. Remove the mounting screws and remove the actuator from
the door lock assembly.
2. Pull the actuator downward and remove it from the door lock
assembly.
ASSEMBLY
1. Insert the actuator pivot into the door lock assembly’s knob
lever.
2. Locate the lock lever and actuator pivot to lock position and
check if it is securely engaged.
BT-61
REAR DOOR LOCK
Rear Door Lock
Components Diagram
Inspection • Adjustment
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to “Body and Trim” (BT-
30).
REFERENCE:
screen.
Outside Handle Rod Adjustment

Adjust by rotating the bush so that the gap between the bush and
rod becomes as shown in the illustration.
REFERENCE:
z Do not let the gap become 0 mm or rod always be pressed.
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door finisher.
REFERENCE:
z When reusing the sealing screen, cut the butyl tape with a
cutter so that the butyl tape remains on the sealing screen.
3. Open all rear door glasses.
4. Pull out the inside handle escutcheon A.
5. Remove the inside handle mounting screw.
BT-62
REAR DOOR LOCK
6. Disconnect the inside handle rod (door lock assembly side).

7. Disconnect the lock knob rod (door lock assembly side).
8. Open the rod holder using a minus (-) screwdriver and remove
the rod.
9. Push the inside handle rearwards and remove it from the door
panel hole.
10. Remove the rod from the inside handle.
11. Remove the mounting bolts and remove the lower chassis rear
by pulling downward.
12. Remove the connector on the door lock actuator.
13. Remove the mounting screws and remove the door lock as-
sembly from the work hole.
14. Remove the mounting bolts and remove the outside handle.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
z During door lock assembly installation, apply the “Anti-
corrosion wax M-97 Super” on body side.
z To install the rod, rotate the rod holder until each rod
clicks.
DISASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
z Perform the actuator removal/installation after removing
the door lock assembly from the vehicle.
1. Remove the mounting screws and remove the actuator from
the door lock assembly.
2. Pull the actuator downward and remove it from the door lock
assembly.
ASSEMBLY
1. Insert the actuator pivot into the door lock assembly’s knob
lever.
2. Locate the lock lever and actuator pivot to lock position and
check if it is securely engaged.
BT-63
TRUNK LID
Trunk Lid
Assembly Dimension Adjustment
FORE & AFT AND LEFT & RIGHT GAP ADJUSTMENT

1. Remove the striker. Remove the trunk lid hinge mounting bolts and close the trunk lid.
2. After adjusting the gap between the left and right and with the rear window glass, open the trunk lid and
tighten the mounting bolts to the specified torque.
SURFACE DIFFERENCE (FLUSH) ADJUSTMENT

1. Remove the striker mounting bolts. Lift the striker and temporarily insert the upper mounting bolts while
striker is at the highest point.
2. Lightly close the trunk lid. Open the trunk lid and tighten the striker mounting bolts to the specified
torque after adjusting the surface difference (flush).
BT-64
TRUNK LID
Removal • Installation of Trunk Lid Assembly
1. Remove all connectors in the trunk lid. Remove all harness

clamps and then remove the harness from the trunk lid by pull-
ing it out.
2. R e m o v e t h e m o u n t i n g b o l t s a n d r e m o v e t h e t r u n k l i d
assembly.
CAUTION:
z Apply the anti-corrosion wax on the connection be-
tween the trunk lid and hinge.
z After tightening the hinge mounting bolts, apply touch-
up paint on the bolt heads with the same color.
Removal • Installation of Trunk Lid Lock & Striker

LOCK REMOVAL
1. Remove the trunk lid finisher.
2. Remove the trunk lid lock cover.
3. Remove the mounting bolts and remove the trunk lid lock.
STRIKER REMOVAL
1. Remove the trunk rear plate and trunk rear finisher.
BT-65
TRUNK LID
2. Remove the mounting bolts and remove the trunk lid opener
bracket.
3. Remove the mounting bolts and trunk room lamp connector
and remove the trunk lid striker.
4. Remove the trunk lid opener cable from the trunk lid striker.
LOCK AND STRIKER INSTALLATION

1. After installation, lightly close the trunk lid and adjust the lock
and the surface difference.
2. Check the operation after installation.
3. Install the trunk lid lock cover, trunk lid finisher and trunk
finisher.
Removal • Installation of Torsion Bar

CAUTION:
z The folding force of the torsion bar is very strong. Be care-
ful when removing/installing the torsion bar.
z Cover the tool with a cloth to prevent from slipping.
1. Hang the torsion bar wrench onto the torsion bar and remove it
by lifting up.
BT-66
TRUNK LID
Removal • Installation of Trunk Lid Welt Strip
1. Align the welt strip marking to the vehicle center position mark-
ing from the front and then install.
2. For the rear, insert the welt strip connections into the center
of the striker.
3. After installation, check if the welt strip is not loose by pulling
it lightly.
CAUTION:
z Securely install the each corner and trunk lid rear plate
area.
BT-67
TRUNK LID & FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
Trunk Lid & Fuel Filler Lid Opener
Components Location
BT-68
WIRING HARNESS
SECTION WH
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION PHASE ................................................................... 2 9
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System WTS ........................................................................ 3 0
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE- Oxygen Sensor .................................................... 3 1
TENSIONER” ............................................................... 5 Knock Sensor ....................................................... 3 2
A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor .................... 3 3
ENGINE ETC- 01 ................................................................. 3 4
ETC- 02 ................................................................. 3 5
ENGINE (QG1.5) AWU ....................................................................... 3 6
P.S Signal ............................................................. 3 7
Circuit Diagram ........................................................... 6
AT Communication .............................................. 3 8
Wiring Diagram ........................................................... 7
Ignition ................................................................... 3 9
Power & Ground .................................................... 7
Injector ................................................................... 4 0
POS .......................................................................... 8
Fuel Pump ............................................................ 4 1
PHASE ..................................................................... 9
Canister ................................................................ 4 2
WTS ........................................................................ 1 0
CVTC ...................................................................... 4 3
Oxygen Sensor .................................................... 11
AFM ......................................................................... 4 4
Knock Sensor ....................................................... 1 2
Ignition Signal ...................................................... 4 5
A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor .................... 1 3
ECM Power Supply .............................................. 4 6
TPS ......................................................................... 1 4
Neutral Position Signal ...................................... 4 7
P.S Signal ............................................................. 1 5
AT Signal ............................................................... 4 8
AT Communication .............................................. 1 6
Cooling Fan .......................................................... 4 9
Ignition ................................................................... 1 7
Diagnosis ............................................................. 5 0
Injector ................................................................... 1 8
Fuel Pump ............................................................ 1 9
Canister ................................................................ 2 0
CHASSIS
ISC ......................................................................... 2 1
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
MAP ........................................................................ 2 2
AT Communication .............................................. 2 3 Circuit Diagram ......................................................... 5 1
Cooling Fan .......................................................... 2 4 Wiring Diagram ......................................................... 5 2
Diagnosis ............................................................. 2 5 AT ............................................................................ 5 2
AT- Device ............................................................. 5 7
ENGINE (QG1.6)
ABS SYSTEM
Circuit Diagram ......................................................... 2 6
Wiring Diagram ......................................................... 2 7 Circuit Diagram ......................................................... 5 8
Power & Ground .................................................. 2 7 Wiring Diagram ......................................................... 5 9
POS ........................................................................ 2 8
CONTENTS
ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
ELECTRIC Circuit Diagram ......................................................... 9 9
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 100
SRS AIRBAG Anti-Theft ............................................................ 1 0 0
Circuit Diagram ......................................................... 6 2 POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram ......................................................... 6 3 Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 103
MANUAL/AUTO AIR CONDITIONER Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 104
Circuit Diagram ......................................................... 6 5 Power Window .................................................. 104
Manual A/C ............................................................ 6 5 CHARGING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram ......................................................... 6 6 Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 107
Manual A/C ............................................................ 6 6 Charge ................................................................ 107
Circuit Diagram ......................................................... 7 1
STARTING SYSTEM
Auto A/C ................................................................. 7 1
Wiring Diagram ......................................................... 7 2 Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 108
Auto A/C ................................................................. 7 2 Start (M/T) ......................................................... 108
Start (A/T) ........................................................... 109
AUDIO
HEADLAMP
Circuit Diagram ......................................................... 7 8
Audio ...................................................................... 7 8 Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 110
Wiring Diagram ......................................................... 7 9 Headlamp ............................................................ 110
Audio ..................................................................... 79 Headlamp (Auto Light) ..................................... 111
COMBINATION METER TAIL LAMP
Circuit Diagram ......................................................... 82 Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 112
Wiring Diagram ......................................................... 83 Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 113
Warning light ........................................................ 83 Tail lamp ............................................................. 113
Gage ...................................................................... 87 FRONT FOG LAMP
COMBINATION METER - CHIME Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 115
Circuit Diagram ......................................................... 89 Fog lamp (FR) .................................................... 115
Wiring Diagram ......................................................... 90 ROOM LAMP
Warning light (Buzzer) ....................................... 90 Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 116
Meter ..................................................................... 92 Room lamp ......................................................... 116
Meter (Diagnosis) ................................................ 93
GLOBE BOX LAMP
LOCK • UNLOCK
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 118
Circuit Diagram ......................................................... 94 Globe Box Lamp ................................................ 118
Wiring Diagram ......................................................... 95
Lock-Unlock .......................................................... 9 5
CONTENTS
TRUNK ROOM LAMP TRUNK LID OPENER
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 119 Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 135
Trunk room lamp ............................................... 119 Trunk Opener ..................................................... 135
STOP LAMP SUN ROOF
Stop lamp ........................................................... 120 Sunroof ................................................................ 136
REVERSE LAMP DEFOGGER, DE-ICER
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 121 Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 137
Reverse lamp ..................................................... 121 Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 138
ILLUMINATION Defogger .............................................................. 138
Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 122 MIRROR
Illumination ......................................................... 123 Mirror ................................................................... 140
TURN SIGNAL LAMP • HAZARD LAMP CAN COMMUNICATION
Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 127 Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 141
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 128 CAN Communication ........................................ 141
Turn signal lamp ................................................ 128 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
DIGITAL CLOCK Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 142
Digital Clock ....................................................... 130 Power ................................................................... 143
WIPER Ground ................................................................. 150
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 131 ELECTRICAL UNIT LOCATION
Wiper ................................................................... 131 Engine Room ........................................................... 161
HORN Interior ....................................................................... 162
Trunk room ............................................................... 163
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 132
Horn ..................................................................... 132 HARNESS DIAGRAM
CIGARETTE LIGHTER / POWER SOCKET Overall ....................................................................... 164
How to Read Harness Layout .............................. 165
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 133
Power Socket .................................................... 133
HEATER SEAT
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 134
Heater Seat ........................................................ 134
CONTENTS
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Room Harness ........................................... 166
Main Harness .......................................................... 168
Engine Control Harness (QG15) .......................... 170
Engine Control Harness (QG16) .......................... 172
Body, Body No. 2, Tail and Room lamp harness ..
................................................................................... 174
Door Harness ........................................................... 176
FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BLOCK (J/B)
Fuse Block .............................................................. 178
Connector ................................................................ 178
FUSE & FUSIBLE LINK BOX
Fuse & Fusible Link Box ....................................... 179
CONTROL UNIT, JOINT CONNECTOR
Terminal Arrangement ........................................... 180
PRECAUTION
Precaution
WARNING:
z To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury
or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance
must be performed by an authorized RENAULT SAMSUNG dealer.
z Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, and disconnect both battery cables.
Then wait at least 3 minutes. (This is to discharge all the remaining electricity in the airbag
sensor unit’s auxiliary power circuit.)
z Do not use any electrical test equipments such as circuit tester when inspecting the SRS
airbag and pretensioner seatbelt circuit while installed unless instructed to in this Ser-
vice Manual. (The weak current in the tester can cause the SRS airbag to operate.)
z Do not insert any foreign materials such as a screwdriver in the airbag module and
pretensioner seatbelt connector in order to prevent unintended operation due to static
electricity.
z Do not leave SRSairbag unit and pre-tensioner seat belt related components in the place
where the temperature is above 80°C.
WH-5
ENGINE (QG1.5)
Circuit Diagram
WH-6
ENGINE (QG1.5)
Wiring Diagram EC/Power & Ground
WH-7
ENGINE (QG1.5)
Wiring Diagram EC/POS
WH-8
ENGINE (QG1.5)
Wiring Diagram EC/PHASE
WH-9
ENGINE (QG1.5)
Wiring Diagram EC/WTS
WH-10
ENGINE (QG1.5)
Wiring Diagram EC/Oxygen Sensor
WH-11
ENGINE (QG1.5)
Wiring Diagram EC/Knock Sensor
WH-12
ENGINE (QG1.5)
Wiring Diagram EC/A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
WH-13
ENGINE (QG1.5)
Wiring Diagram EC/TPS
WH-14
ENGINE (QG1.5)
Wiring Diagram EC/P . S Signal
WH-15
ENGINE (QG1.5)
Wiring Diagram EC/AT Communication
WH-16
ENGINE (QG1.5)
Wiring Diagram EC/Ignition
WH-17
ENGINE (QG1.5)
Wiring Diagram EC/Injector
WH-18
ENGINE (QG1.5)
Wiring Diagram EC/Fuel Pump
WH-19
ENGINE (QG1.5)
Wiring Diagram EC/Canister
WH-20
ENGINE (QG1.5)
Wiring Diagram EC/ISC
WH-21
ENGINE (QG1.5)
Wiring Diagram EC/MAP
WH-22
ENGINE (QG1.5)
WH-23
ENGINE (QG1.5)
Wiring Diagram EC/Cooling Fan
WH-24
ENGINE (QG1.5)
Wiring Diagram EC/Diagnosis
WH-25
ENGINE (QG1.6)
Circuit Diagram
WH-26
ENGINE (QG1.6)
Wiring Diagram EC/Power & Ground
WH-27
ENGINE (QG1.6)
Wiring Diagram EC/POS
WH-28
ENGINE (QG1.6)
Wiring Diagram EC/PHASE
WH-29
ENGINE (QG1.6)
Wiring Diagram EC/WTS
WH-30
ENGINE (QG1.6)
Wiring Diagram EC/Oxygen Sensor
WH-31
ENGINE (QG1.6)
Wiring Diagram EC/Knock Sensor
WH-32
ENGINE (QG1.6)
Wiring Diagram EC/A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
WH-33
ENGINE (QG1.6)
Wiring Diagram EC/ETC- 01
WH-34
ENGINE (QG1.6)
Wiring Diagram EC/ETC- 02
WH-35
ENGINE (QG1.6)
Wiring Diagram EC/AWU
WH-36
ENGINE (QG1.6)
Wiring Diagram EC/P . S Signal
WH-37
ENGINE (QG1.6)
WH-38
ENGINE (QG1.6)
Wiring Diagram EC/Ignition
WH-39
ENGINE (QG1.6)
Wiring Diagram EC/Injector
WH-40
ENGINE (QG1.6)
Wiring Diagram EC/Fuel Pump
WH-41
ENGINE (QG1.6)
Wiring Diagram EC/Canister
WH-42
ENGINE (QG1.6)
Wiring Diagram EC/CVTC
WH-43
ENGINE (QG1.6)
Wiring Diagram EC/AFM
WH-44
ENGINE (QG1.6)
Wiring Diagram EC/Ignition Signal
WH-45
ENGINE (QG1.6)
Wiring Diagram EC/ECM Power Supply
WH-46
ENGINE (QG1.6)
Wiring Diagram EC/Neutral Position Signal
WH-47
ENGINE (QG1.6)
Wiring Diagram EC/AT Signal
WH-48
ENGINE (QG1.6)
Wiring Diagram EC/Cooling Fan
WH-49
ENGINE (QG1.6)
Wiring Diagram EC/Diagnosis
WH-50
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
Circuit Diagram
WH-51
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
Wiring Diagram AT/AT-01
WH-52
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
WH-53
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
WH-54
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
WH-55
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
WH-56
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
Wiring Diagram AT/AT- Device
WH-57
ABS SYSTEM
Circuit Diagram
WH-58
ABS SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram BR/ABS-01
WH-59
ABS SYSTEM
WH-60
ABS SYSTEM
WH-61
SRS AIRBAG
Circuit Diagram
WH-62
SRS AIRBAG
WH-63
SRS AIRBAG
WH-64
MANUAL/AUTO AIR CONDITIONER
Circuit Diagram - Manual A/C
WH-65
Wiring Diagram MANUAL A/C- 01
WH-66
WH-67
WH-68
WH-69
WH-70
Circuit Diagram - Auto A/C
WH-71
Wiring Diagram AUTO A/C- 01
WH-72
WH-73
WH-74
WH-75
WH-76
WH-77
AUDIO
Circuit Diagram - Audio
WH-78
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram AV/Audio- 01
WH-79
AUDIO
WH-80
AUDIO
WH-81
COMBINATION METER
Circuit Diagram
WH-82
COMBINATION METER
Wiring Diagram EL/Warning Light- 01
WH-83
COMBINATION METER
WH-84
COMBINATION METER
WH-85
COMBINATION METER
WH-86
COMBINATION METER
Wiring Diagram EL/Gage- 01
WH-87
COMBINATION METER
Wiring Diagram EL/Gage- 02
WH-88
COMBINATION METER - CHIME
Circuit Diagram
WH-89
Wiring Diagram EL/Warning Light (Buzzer)- 01
WH-90
Wiring Diagram EL/Warning Light (Buzzer)- 02
WH-91
COMBINATION METER- CHIME
Wiring Diagram EL/Meter- 01
WH-92
COMBINATION METER- CHIME
Wiring Diagram EL/Meter (Diagnosis)- 02
WH-93
LOCK • UNLOCK
Circuit Diagram
WH-94
LOCK • UNLOCK
Wiring Diagram EL/Lock-Unlock- 01
WH-95
LOCK • UNLOCK
WH-96
LOCK • UNLOCK
WH-97
LOCK • UNLOCK
WH-98
ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
Circuit Diagram
WH-99
ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram EL/Anti-Theft- 01
WH-100
ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
WH-101
ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
WH-102
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Circuit Diagram
WH-103
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram EL/Power Window- 01
WH-104
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
WH-105
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
WH-106
CHARGING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram EL/Charge
WH-107
STARTING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram EL/Start (M/T)- 01
WH-108
STARTING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram EL/Start (A/T)- 02
WH-109
HEADLAMP
Wiring Diagram EL/Headlamp
WH-110
HEADLAMP
Wiring Diagram EL-Headlamp (Auto Light)
WH-111
TAIL LAMP
Circuit Diagram
WH-112
TAIL LAMP
Wiring Diagram EL/Tail Lamp- 01
WH-113
TAIL LAMP
Wiring Diagram EL/Tail Lamp- 02
WH-114
FRONT FOG LAMP
Wiring Diagram EL/Fog Lamp (FR)
WH-115
ROOM LAMP
Wiring Diagram EL/Room Lamp- 01
WH-116
ROOM LAMP
Wiring Diagram EL/Room Lamp- 02
WH-117
GLOBE BOX LAMP
Wiring Diagram EL/Globe Box Lamp
WH-118
TRUNK ROOM LAMP
Wiring Diagram EL/Trunk Room Lamp
WH-119
STOP LAMP
Wiring Diagram EL/Stop Lamp
WH-120
REVERSE LAMP
Wiring Diagram EL/Reverse Lamp
WH-121
ILLUMINATION
Circuit Diagram
WH-122
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram EL/Illumination- 01
WH-123
ILLUMINATION
WH-124
ILLUMINATION
WH-125
ILLUMINATION
WH-126
Circuit Diagram
WH-127
Wiring Diagram EL/Turn Signal Lamp- 01
WH-128
Wiring Diagram EL/Turn Signal Lamp- 02
WH-129
DIGITAL CLOCK
Wiring Diagram EL/Digital Clock
WH-130
WIPER
Wiring Diagram EL/Wiper
WH-131
HORN
Wiring Diagram EL/Horn
WH-132
CIGARETTE LIGHTER / POWER SOCKET
Wiring Diagram EL/Power Socket
WH-133
HEATER SEAT
Wiring Diagram EL/Heater Seat
WH-134
TRUNK LID OPENER
Wiring Diagram EL/Trunk Opener
WH-135
SUN ROOF
Wiring Diagram EL/Sunroof
WH-136
DEFOGGER, DE-ICER
Circuit Diagram
WH-137
DEFOGGER, DE-ICER
Wiring Diagram EL/Defogger- 01
WH-138
DEFOGGER, DE-ICER
Wiring Diagram EL/Defogger- 02
WH-139
MIRROR
Wiring Diagram EL/Mirror
WH-140
CAN COMMUNICATION
Wiring Diagram EL-CAN Communication
WH-141
Circuit Diagram
WH-142
Wiring Diagram EL/Power- 01
WH-143
WH-144
WH-145
WH-146
WH-147
WH-148
WH-149
Wiring Diagram EL/Ground-Engine Room 01
ENGINE ROOM HARNESS
WH-150
ENGINE ROOM HARNESS-CONTINUED
WH-151
ENGINE ROOM HARNESS-CONTINUED
WH-152
Wiring Diagram EL/Ground-Main 01
MAIN HARNESS
WH-153
MAIN HARNESS-CONTINUED
WH-154
WH-155
WH-156
Wiring Diagram EL/Ground-EGI (QG16)
EGI HARNESS (QG16)
WH-157
Wiring Diagram EL/Ground-EGI (QG15)
EGI HARNESS (QG15)
WH-158
Wiring Diagram EL/Ground-Body
BODY HARNESS
WH-159
Wiring Diagram EL/Ground-Tail
TAIL HARNESS
WH-160
ELECTRICAL UNIT LOCATION
ENGINE ROOM
WH-161
INTERIOR
WH-162
TRUNK ROOM
WH-163
HARNESS DIAGRAM
OVERALL
WH-164
HARNESS DIAGRAM
How to Read Harness Layout
Example:
G2 E1 B/6 : Mode door actuator
Connector name
Connector color/
Connector Number of terminals
Grid reference number
The following harness layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings.
z Engine room harness (Engine Compartment)
z Main harness
z Engine control harness
z Body harness, Body No.2 harness, Tail harness
z Door harness
TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE

z Find the desired connector number on the connector list.
z Find the grid reference.
z On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row.
z Find the connecter number in the crossing zone.
z Follow the line to the connector.
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Main symbols of connector (in harness layout) are indicated in the below.
Connector type Male Female
z Number of terminals: Less than 4

z Relay connector
z Number of terminals: 5 - 8
z Number of terminals: More than 9
z Ground terminal or others
WIRE
: Indicates the thickness of the wire is over 5 mm
: Indicates the thickness of the wire is below 5 mm
WH-165
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Room Harness
WH-166
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Room Harness (Continued)
WH-167
HARNESS LAYOUT
Main Harness
WH-168
HARNESS LAYOUT
Main Harness (Continued)
WH-169
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Control Harness (QG15)
WH-170
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Control Harness (QG15) (Continued)
WH-171
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Control Harness (QG16)
WH-172
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Control Harness (QG16) (Continued)
WH-173
HARNESS LAYOUT
Body, Body No. 2, Tail and Room Lamp Harness
WH-174
HARNESS LAYOUT
Body, Body No. 2, Tail and Room Lamp Harness (Continued)
WH-175
HARNESS LAYOUT
Door Harness
WH-176
HARNESS LAYOUT
Door Harness
WH-177
FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BLOCK (J/B)
Fuse Block
Connector
WH-178
FUSE & FUSIBLE LINK BOX
Fuse & Fusible Link Box
WH-179
Terminal Arrangement
WH-180
Terminal Arrangement
WH-181
DIAGNOSIS
SECTION DS
SM3 06 M.Y
01E TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WITH CLIP
88B CAN NETWORK
38C ABS SYSTEM
83A COMBINATION METER
82D REMOTE CONTROLLER & SMART
87V PARKING AID SYSTEM

01E: TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WITH CLIP
88B: CAN NETWORK

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - OVERVIEW
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - CIRCUIT DIAGRAM & WIRING DIAGRAM
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - DESCRIPTION
38C: ABS SYSTEM

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SYSTEM OVERVIEW
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - DTC LIST
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - FAULT DESCRIPTION
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - CONFORMITY CHECK
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - STATUS & PARAMETER LIST
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - STATUS & PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - ACTIVE TEST LIST
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - ACTIVE TEST DESCRIPTION
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - CHECK BY SYMPTOMS
83A: COMBINATION METER

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SYSTEM OVERVIEW
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - READ AND WRITE CONFIGURATION
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - STATUS & PARAMETER LIST
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - STATUS & PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
82D: REMOTE CONTROLLER & SMART
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - WRITE CONFIGURATION & PROGRHAMING
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - STATUS AND PARAMETERS LIST
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - STATUS AND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION
87V: PARKING AID SYSTEM

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - STATUS AND PARAMETERS LIST
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - STATUS AND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WITH CLIP 01E
Description
CAN network is equipped to all SM3 06 MY models. Therefore, CAN network for each ECU should be
checked before troubleshooting the vehicle.
Characteristics of CLIP Trouble Diagnosis

1. Enhancement of CAN network test
It provides more accurate and complete trouble diagnosis by performing the CAN network trouble diag-
nosis before diagnosing other parts.
The diagnosis result can be accessed by simple operation.
2. Functional classification
Diagnostic function by mode is now available for multi-functional ECU.
Conventional) Combination Meter

z Input signals
z Main Signals
z All signals
New) Combination Meter

z Function of gauges and indicators Instrument panel - Display
z Function of BCM Body control - Timer control
z Function of remote entry system Remote controller & Smart - Lock/Unlock
z Function of immobilizer Remote controller & Smart - Protection
3. ECU check function

The ECU check function is dramatically enhanced by CAN communication.
It secures that the diagnosis program works with the appropriate ECU and it also reduces the possibility
of improper data display.
In addition to, the unavailable status data in a ECU for a specific vehicle are held as INACTIVE so that
mechanics can identify them easily.
01E-1
ECU List in SM3 06 MY Nodel
Communication CAN
ECU Installation Function
protocol network
QG15 SEMENS ECM By models KWP2000 Y Engine control

QG16 HITACHI ECM By models DDL2 Y Engine control
JATCO 4-speed TCM Optional DDL1 Y Transmission
Instrument panel
Combination meter C/U Default CAN Y Remote controller &
SmartBody control
Airbag C/U Default KWP2000 N Air bag
ABS C/U Optional DDL2 N Brake system
PAS C/U Optional KWP2000 N Parking aid system
Y: CAN network contains this ECU.

N: CAN network does not contain this ECU.
01E-2
Diagnostic Procedure
ECU power supply
To perform the trouble diagnosis for ECU, run CLIP while the ignition switch is in ON position or engine is
running.
Operation procedure
The operation procedure for SM3 06 MY model is shown as below:
Make sure that “RENAULT SAMSUNG MOTORS” is

selected in Vehicle Make box.
Ignore the Vehicle VIN box as it is not used in

SM3 06 MY model.
Select “SM3 06 MY” in Vehicle Type box.
The After-sales Type is fixed to DOMESTIC.
Select “COMPUTER TEST”.
Defective CAN network segment,

CAN Network Test Disabled ECU communication /
Disabled ECU recognition
ECU communication disable /

Overall ECU diagnosis result ECU recognition disable
Check for DTC
Current failure / Historic failure

Sectional trouble diagnosis Status / Parameter
Active Test
Check for specifications
01E-3
Main Menu
z Vehicle VIN:
Not available in SM3 06 MY.
z Vehicle type:
Select “SM3 - 06 MY”.
01E-4
Integrity Test of CAN Network

z Result of Integrity test
This step is for diagnosing the CAN network and displayed as topology type.
If CAN network has a defect, the segment is displayed in black or red.
ECU information area:
Valid: It means that ECU can respond to the communication and communicate with diagnos-
tic device.
ABG: Air bag

BRK: ABS system
ECM: Engine control system
MTR: Combination meter
Not diagnosable: ECU does not respond to the communication.

It cannot communication with diagnostic device.
01E-5
Complete Trouble Diagnosis

z Trouble diagnosis result
It displays the failure detected from each ECU.
ECU information area:
Without faults: ECU self-diagnosis didn't detect any current or historic failures.
ABG: Air bag
With faults: ECU self-diagnosis detected some current or historic failures.
BRK: ABS system

ECM: Engine control system
MTR: Combination meter
Not detected: CLIP cannot communicate with ECU for diagnosis.

Not recognised: The communication is available, but the version of ECU is not correct.
01E-6
Overview of Sectional Trouble Diagnosis
NOTICE:
The menu can be changed by mouse and its function can be checked by clicking the left mouse
button.
1. Home: It is used to go back to the main screen when performing the trouble diagnosis again after
completion of a diagnosis.
2. Back to the last screen: It is used to go back to the previous screen from the current screen.
3. Diagnosis mode: It is used to select the ECU diagnosis mode. It displays self-diagnosis, active text, etc.
4. Repair mode: It is used for ECU repair mode. It displays read configuration, write configuration and
programming function.
5. Print: It is used to print the current diagnosis screen.
6. Help: It is used to connect to the CLIP user manual.
A. Main data: It displays the number of current and historic failures and main data resulted in self-diagnosis.
B. Computer identification: It displays various ECU versions and information.
C. Fault check: It is used to confirm DTC stored in ECU.
D. Read status and parameters: It is used to check various data recognized by ECU.
E. Actuator: It is used to check the related circuits by running various solenoids temporarily.
F. Technical notes: It is used to check the diagnosis manual (will be available).
G. Conformity check: It displays the conformity check section of diagnosis manual (will be available).
H. Check for customer complaint: It displays the diagnosis manual’s diagnosis sections by types (will be
available).
01E-7
Diagnosis Mode
1. Main data
z It displays the number of current and historic failures.

z Major status and parameter data can be accessed.
01E-8
Diagnosis Mode - Cont’d

2. Computer identification
z It displays various ECU version data including part number.
01E-9

Fault check
z It displays the information for DTC.

z It displays the failure status data such as short, open, etc.
(Example: CO,CC.CC.1..)
z It displays when the fault is detected (current fault: Red light comes on, historic failure: Yellow light
blinks)
z For ECU that stores the data when fault occurs, the stored data can be checked by clicking the DTC
index label.
01E-10

Read status and parameters
z Data is classified by function.

z The input signal from CAN network is displayed in blue. If clicking the index number, you can check the
corresponding ECU and move to the diagnosis mode.
z For parameter, if clicking index label, it displays the help information for specific range.
01E-11
Diagnosis Mode - Cont'd

Active test
z Active test is classified by function.

z For some active tests, you can run the test and check status & parameter data simultaneously.
z The operating condition is displayed in the command status bar on top (example: COMMAND PROGRESS
or COMMAND FINISH).
01E-12
Repair Mode
Read configuration
z Various configuration can be accessed that is set in ECU EEPROM.
01E-13
Repair Mode
Write configuration
z The write configuration screen is displayed by clicking the item you want to set.
z The configuration setting is completed by selecting the corresponding value to the vehicle and pressing
OK.
z It outputs the corresponding message to the command status (example : COMMAND FINISH..)
01E-14
Repair Mode
Other configuration
z It is used to register simple function, reset ECU, etc.
(Example: remote controller registration, system initialization)
Programming
z Complicated registration function including scenario function is set.
(Example: ECM immobilizer registration, etc.)
Erase
z It is possible to clear DTC and various learning value stored in ECU.
01E-15
CAN NETWORK
88B
Overview for CAN Network
CAUTION:
The multi-communication network for SM3 06 MY vehicle can be diagnosed using CLIP (diagnosis
software V2).
CAN network is composed of one pair of twisted wires connected to various vehicle ECUs with CAN protocol.
These wires are known for CAN-HI and CAN-LOW.
Internal resistance of two ECUs of all is 120Ω (terminal resistance).

- Airbag control unit
- Engine control unit
ECUs exchange the information using CAN network.
The signal speed of CAN protocol is 500kBaud which is high-speed vehicle communication.
For SM3 06 MY, three ECUs are connected to CAN network.
Purpose For Multiplex Communication Network Test

z CAN network test is to find the cause of fault in communication between ECUs in CAN network.
z This test also checks for the status of CAN network segments.
z With CAN network test, diagnosis network lines or ECUs not connected to CAN network can be found.
Also, it provides overall layout of ECUs.
88B-1
CAN NETWORK
88B
How to Perform CAN Network Test

Start engine and connect diagnosis device (CLIP). (Check if every LED on CAN-adapter is on.)
Select CLIP icon and select SM3 06 MY for vehicle type as shown in figure.
CLIP starts to communicate with ECUs automatically and acquires data.
88B-2
CAN NETWORK
88B
It displays ECUs detected through diagnosis communication.

After check the vehicle option again, select “Continue” after modifying information if there is information
needed to be modified.
It displays the result of CAN network diagnosis and status of ECUs in vehicle as shown in figure.
It moves to self-diagnosis mode of each ECU if pressing “Continue”.
88B-3
CAN NETWORK
88B
The green or red symbol indicates the result of self-diagnosis as shown in figure.
(Green : No failure detected. Red : failure detected)
88B-4
CAN NETWORK
88B
CAN Network Test Analysis and Self-Diagnosis Result
z Green box: Communication between ECU and CLIP is normal.

z Black box: ECU without diagnosis function (example : DU/DCU of SM5 and SM7)
z Red box: ECU can be diagnosed, but cannot be communicated due to the fault in power supply line or
others.
z Green line: Indicates normal CAN network line.
z Black or red line: CAN line segment that cannot be diagnosed or malfunctioning
If it does not display diagnosis screen of CAN network, check the circuit continuity between diagnosis
connector CAN-H and each ECU CAN-H terminal, CAN lines for short to body or power, CAN lines for short
to other CAN lines. Repair if necessary.
88B-5
CAN NETWORK
88B
CAN Network Type
Area Domestic or Export

Engine QG15DE QG16DE K9K
Transmission MT AT MT AT MT
ECM O O O O O
TCM - O - O -
Combination meter O O O O O
CAN communication type Type 1-0 Type 1-1 Type 2-0 Type 2-1 Type 3-0
CAN Network Diagram
88B-6
CAN NETWORK
88B
CAN Network Signals

T: Transmit R: Receive
Combination
Signal QG ECM K9K ECM TCM
meter C/U
Engine speed signal T T R

Engine coolant temperature T T R
Engine CHECK warning lamp (MIL) signal T T R
A/T CHECK lamp signal T R
A/T position indicator signal T R
Vehicle speed signal R T
A/C request signal R R T
Blower motor status signal R R T
R R T
Engine/AT integrated control signal
T T R
Rear defogger switch signal R T
Tail lamp request signal R T
Fuel gauge R T
Reverse switch R Note 1 T
Neutral switch R Note 1 T
Snow mode signal T R
88B-7
CAN NETWORK
88B
Wiring Diagram EL-CAN Communication
88B-8
CAN NETWORK
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - DESCRIPTION
88B
CAN Network - Fault Segment
Check if the ECU of fault segment is properly supplied with power and ground.
(Battery power, ACC power or IGN ON power, ground)
NOTES Always check if the ECU operates properly.
Important: If multiple CAN network-fault segments are displayed in red and black,
repair the damaged part for red and perform CAN network test again.
CAN network terminal register inspection

Check resistance of CAN-H and CAN-L of DLC connector.
z If 0Ω is detected, CAN-H and CAN-L is shorted.
z If 120 ± 10Ω is detected, CAN line is open.
z If 60 ± 6Ω is detected, it is normal.
Check resistance of terminal registered in ECM and meter. Specified value: Approx. 120 ± 12Ω
If necessary, replace the related parts.
CAN network - CAN-H and CAN-L inspection for fault segment
Disconnect ECU connectors to CAN network and then,
z Check for the continuity of CAN-H in each connector.
Specified value: Continuity should exist
z Check for the continuity between vehicle body and CAN-H in each connector.
Specified value: Continuity should not exist
z Check for the continuity of CAN-L in each connector.
z Check for the continuity between vehicle body and CAN-L in each connector.
z Check for the continuity between CAN-H and CAL-L.
If necessary, repair the related parts.
AFTER Perform the integrity test of CAN network again using diagnosis device (CLIP).
REPAIR Erase DTCs stored in every ECU which is connected to network.
88B-9
CAN NETWORK
88B
Malfunctioning ECU / ECU Not Recognized In Network
Check if the ECU installed in vehicle is designated ECU for SM3 06MY.
Check for the power supply and ground of ECU (battery, ACC, IGN power).
NOTES
Check CAN adapter

Check if all four LEDs on CAN adapter are on, and then perform the test again.
If necessary, install USB driver of CAN adapter again or contact call center.
Check for power supply and ground
To stabilize the power supply of vehicle, start engine or connect battery to external power source.
Service manual - Check by symptoms (communication is not available)
Perform diagnosis procedures according to the chart for ECU (in case of communication is not
available) while referring to the service manual.
If the fault still exists, replace the defective ECU.
AFTER Perform the integrity test of CAN network again using diagnosis device (CLIP).
REPAIR Erase DTCs stored in every ECU which is connected to network.
88B-10
ABS BOSCH 8.0 ABS SYSTEM
No Vdiag: 00 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - OVERVIEW
38C
1. Application
This diagnosis manual is applied to the vehicle type and functions below.
Vehicle type: SM3 06 MY ECU name: ABS BOSCH 8.0

Function: ABS N Vdiag: 00
2. Required components for diagnosis

Diagnosis manual
Service manual (this technical material), technical bulletin
Wiring diagram
Circuit diagram, wiring diagram
Diagnostic device
CLIP
CST (Commercial Service Tool)
Commercial Service Tools

Multi-meter
3. Preparation
Procedure
Diagnosis should be started when the ignition switch is in ON position.
38C-1
38C
Failure:
There are two types of failure.
z Current failure (occurred under certain conditions and still present)

z Historic failure (occurred under certain conditions but not present)
The status data (open, short, signal failure, etc.) for current or historic failures also should be carefully
considered.
For the current failure, process it according to the procedures prescribed in fault description.
For the historic failure, note the displayed fault and perform the diagnosis referring to the diagnosis trigger-
ing conditions.
Perform the prescribed procedures on the note and perform the basic inspection as follows if the fault is not
detected.
z Conditions of connector, terminal and pin in wiring harness

z Resistance of defective components
z Conditions of wire (melted insulator, cut, friction, etc.)
Conformity check
It is for inspecting the status and parameter which is not detected with the diagnostic device.
In this step:
- Perform diagnosis for fault which is not displayed but possibly matches to the customer complaint.
- Check if the system operates properly and the fault will not be occurred again after repair.
This chapter describes the fault detection procedures for status and parameter and condition for this
inspection.
Refer to the corresponding diagnosis section if the status does not operate correctly or the parameter is
out of tolerance range.
Customer complaint - Fault detection chart

Process customer complaint according to the guideline if the check using the diagnostic device is normal
but fault persists.
Logical flow chart on the next page describes the general procedures.
38C-2
38C
4. Diagnostic procedures
Check conditions of battery

charge and fuse.
Print the system diagnosis

sheet.
(Clip and service manual or
technical bulletin)
Connect CLIP.
Connect ECU to No
Refer to Trouble diagnosis chart 1.
communication.
Yes
Trouble diagnosis
Malfunction is No
Check conformity
detected.
Yes
Malfunction No Repair
Check current failure
persists completed
Check past failure Yes
Use diagnostic procedure.
persists completed Check past failure
Yes
persists completed
Yes
Connect to tech-line with the

complete diagnosis sheet.
38C-3
38C
4. Diagnostic procedures - Cont’d
Wiring inspection
Precaution
By disconnecting the connector or connecting wiring, the fault symptoms may disappear intermittently.
If this occurs, the measurement values (voltage, resistance, insulator resistance) indicate normal values.
Visual inspection
Check the related harness connector for damage and tightness.
Manual inspection
Check the related harness connectors for poor contact by shaking connectors lightly or pressurizing them
for better tightness.
Component inspection
Remove the connector and check the clip pin for damage.
Resistance inspection
Check for the circuit continuity while referring to the wiring diagram.
Replace the harness wiring if any fault is detected.
38C-4
38C
5. Precautions for safety
When performing the work related to parts, always observe the safety instructions to prevent personal
injury.
z If the diagnosis should be done with the engine running, always connect the exhaust ventilation device.
z To prevent ECU from damaging, fully charge the battery before starting the service works.
z Do not smoke while working.
z Use only the appropriate tools.
z Be extra careful with the air bag wiring harness (indicated as yellow insulator).
Refer to “GI section” for precaution for others SRS airbag.
6. Battery disconnection procedure
z Turn off all switches and electric loads.

z Wait for one minute.
z Disconnect the battery negative cable and then disconnect the battery positive cable.
38C-5
No Vdiag: 00 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SYSTEM OVERVIEW
38C
Description
ABS function
The Anti-Lock Brake System which senses that one or more of the wheels are locking up during braking.
It monitors the rotational speeds of the wheels and reduces hydraulic pressure to any wheel it senses
locking up.
Accordingly, a driver can control the steering even during a sudden braking..
EBD function
Electronic Brake Distribution is a function that detects subtle slippages between front and rear
wheels during braking, and it improves handling stability by electronically controlling Brake Fluid
Pressure which results in reduced rear wheel slippage.
ABS operation
ABS system does not operate when the vehicle speed is below 10 km/h.
The self-diagnosis function is applied to ABS system and it performs the self-diagnosis when the ignition
switch is ON and the vehicle speed reaches 30 km/h. At this time, the mechanical noise can be heard but
it is not malfunction. If it detects malfunction, ABS warning light comes on.
Fail-safe
When the ABS is defective, ABS warning lamp comes on. And, when the EBD system is defective, the
brake warning lamp and ABS warning lamp come on simultaneously.
1. If the ABS is defective, only EBD system can be activated. The brake system works as the vehicle
without ABS system.
2. If the EBD system is defective, the brake system works as the vehicle without EBD and ABS system.
38C-6
38C
Control system diagram
Hydraulic circuit diagram
38C-7
No Vdiag: 00 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - CIRCUIT DIAGRAM & WIRING DIAGRAM
38C
ABS System Circuit Diagram
38C-8
38C
38C-9
38C
38C-10
38C
38C-11
No Vdiag: 00 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - DTC LIST
38C
DTC label DTC Fault Remarks

DF061 5101 RR RH wheel speed sensor
DF062 5102 RR LH wheel speed sensor
DF059 5103 FR RH wheel speed sensor
DF060 5104 FR LH wheel speed sensor
DF242 5105 RR RH wheel speed sensor 2
DF243 5106 RR LH wheel speed sensor 2
DF244 5107 FR RH wheel speed sensor 2
DF245 5108 FR LH wheel speed sensor 2
DF246 5115 ABS sensor - abnormal signal
DF002 5120 FR/LH inlet solenoid
DF004 5121 FR/LH outlet solenoid
DF022 5122 FR/RH inlet solenoid
DF024 5123 FR/RH outlet solenoid
DF023 5126 RR/RH inlet solenoid
DF025 5127 RR/RH outlet solenoid
DF003 5124 RR/LH inlet solenoid
DF005 5125 RR/LH outlet solenoid
DF016 5111 ABS motor
DF184 5114 Solenoid valve relay
DF123 5116 ABS warning lamp (brake switch)
DF021 5109 Battery voltage
NO 5110 ECU MALFUNCTION (control unit)
38C-12
No Vdiag: 00 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - FAULT DESCRIPTION
38C
DF061
Current or RR RH wheel speed sensor
History
DTC If the RR RH wheel speed sensor is open or shorted Drive the vehicle with the
Detecting speed over 30 km/h after erasing DTC to check if ABS warning lamp goes off.
Condition
Basic inspection & connector inspection

Perform the basic inspection for brake fluid level, booster operation and brake pad wear.
Check if the wheel speed sensor connector and ABS control unit connector are installed correctly
and check terminal for damage.
Repair if necessary.
RR RH wheel speed sensor circuit inspection
Disconnect ABS control unit connector and wheel speed sensor connector.
Check continuity between ABS C/U E54 connector terminal No. 8 and wheel speed sensor B103
connector terminal No. 1.
Specified value: Continuity should exist (approx. 0Ω)
Check continuity between ABS C/U E54 connector terminal No. 8, 19 and ground.
Check resistance of wheel speed sensor unit.
Specified value: 1.05 ~ 1.35 kΩ
If necessary, repair the circuit or replace the wheel speed sensor.
RR RH wheel speed sensor power supply inspection
Connect ABS control unit connector and wheel speed sensor connector.
Check voltage of wheel speed sensor B103 connector terminal No.1.
Specified value: Approx. 12 V
Repair the circuit if necessary.
Tire, wheel bearing and sensor rotor inspection
Check tires for air pressure and wear and repair them if necessary.
Check the axle end play of wheel bearing and the clearance between sensor and rotor.
Specified value: 0.227 ~ 1.254 mm (front) 0.684 ~ 1.503 mm (rear)
Check sensor rotor and gear for damage.
Perform the fault detection procedure and check the fault does not occur again.
Check
Process the suspected parts.
after repair
Erase the fault memory.
38C-13
38C
DF062
Current or RR LH wheel speed sensor
Past
DTC If the RR LH wheel speed sensor is open or shorted Drive the vehicle with the
Detecting speed over 30 km/h after erasing DTC to check if ABS warning lamp turns off.
Condition

Check if the wheel speed sensor connector and ABS control unit connector are installed cor-
rectly and check terminal for damage.
RR LH wheel speed sensor circuit inspection
Check continuity between ABS C/U E54 connector terminal No. 17 and wheel speed sensor
B102 connector terminal No. 2.
RR LH wheel speed sensor power supply inspection
Check
after repair
38C-14
38C
DF059
Current or FR RH wheel speed sensor
History
DTC If the FR RH wheel speed sensor is open or shorted Drive the vehicle with the
Condition

FR RH wheel speed sensor circuit inspection
Check continuity between ABS C/U E54 connector terminal No. 9 and wheel speed sensor E11
FR RH wheel speed sensor power supply inspection
Check voltage of wheel speed sensor E11 connector terminal No.1.
Check
after repair
38C-15
38C
DF060
Current or FR LH wheel speed sensor
History
DTC If the FR LH wheel speed sensor is open or shorted Drive the vehicle with the
Condition

FR LH wheel speed sensor circuit inspection
Check
after repair
38C-16
38C
DF242
Current or RR RH wheel speed sensor 2
History
If battery voltage to RR RH wheel speed sensor is abnormal or if ABS control

DTC
unit cannot detect the sensor pulse due to the large gap between wheel speed
Detecting
sensor and sensor rotor, drive the vehicle with the speed over 30 km/h after
Condition
erasing DTC to check if ABS warning lamp goes off.

Check
after repair
38C-17
38C
DF243
Current or RR LH wheel speed sensor 2
History
If battery voltage to RR LH wheel speed sensor is abnormal or if ABS control

DTC
unit cannot detect the sensor pulse due to the large gap between wheel
Detecting
speed sensor and sensor rotor, drive the vehicle with the speed over 30
Condition
km/h after erasing DTC to check if ABS warning lamp goes off.

Check
after repair
38C-18
38C
DF244
Current or FR RH wheel speed sensor 2
History
If battery voltage to FR RH wheel speed sensor is abnormal or if ABS control

DTC
Detecting
Condition

Check
after repair
38C-19
38C
DF245
Current or FR LH wheel speed sensor 2
History
If battery voltage to FR LH wheel speed sensor is abnormal or if ABS control

DTC
Detecting
Condition

FR LH wheel speed sensor power supply inspection
Check
after repair
38C-20
38C
DF246
Current or ABS sensor - abnormal signal
History
If sensor signal error from more than one wheel is detected due to the wrong
DTC
number of gear teeth or gear slip, if ABS operates more than 60 seconds, or if
Detecting
more than 2 sensors are met with DTC detecting condition, drive the vehicle with
Condition
the speed over 30 km/h after erasing DTC to check if ABS warning lamp goes off.

Check if the RR RH wheel speed sensor connector and ABS control unit connector are installed
correctly and check terminal for damage.
All wheel speed sensor circuits inspection
Check all wheel speed sensor circuits while referring to fault description.
All wheel speed sensor power supply inspection
Check all wheel speed sensor circuits while referring to fault description.
Check
after repair
38C-21
38C
DF002
Current or FR/LH inlet solenoid
History
DTC If the fault of FR LH inlet solenoid is detected (If ABS control is different
Detecting from electric feedback), drive the vehicle with the speed over 30 km/h after
Condition erasing DTC to check if ABS warning lamp goes off.

Solenoid valve power supply inspection
Check voltage of ABS C/U E54 connector terminal No. 3.
Specified value: Power voltage
ABS control unit ground inspection
Disconnect ABS control unit connector.
Check continuity between ABS C/U E54 connector terminal No. 1, 3 and body.
ABS control unit ignition power supply inspection
Disconnect ABS control unit connector and turn the ignition ON.
Check voltage between ABS C/U E54 connector terminal No. 18 and body.
Check
after repair
38C-22
38C
DF004
Current or FR/LH outlet solenoid
History
DTC If the fault of FR LH outlet solenoid is detected (If ABS control is different

Check
after repair
38C-23
38C
DF022
Current or FR/RH inlet solenoid
History
DTC If the fault of FR RH inlet solenoid is detected (If ABS control is different

Check
after repair
38C-24
38C
DF024
Current or FR/RH outlet solenoid
History
DTC If the fault of FR RH inlet solenoid is detected (If ABS control is different

Check
after repair
38C-25
38C
DF023
Current or RR/RH inlet solenoid
History
DTC If the fault of RR RH inlet solenoid is detected (If ABS control is different

Check
after repair
38C-26
38C
DF025
Current or RR/RH outlet solenoid
History
DTC If the fault of RR RH outlet solenoid is detected (If ABS control is different

Check
after repair
38C-27
38C
DF003
Current or RR/LH inlet solenoid
History
DTC If the fault of RR LH inlet solenoid is detected (If ABS control is different

Check
after repair
38C-28
38C
DF005
Current or RR/LH outlet solenoid
History
DTC If the fault of RR LH outlet solenoid is detected (If ABS control is different

Check
after repair
38C-29
38C
DF016
Current or ABS motor
History
DTC If ABS control unit detects the fault in pump motor and motor relay circuit,
Detecting drive the vehicle with the speed over 30 km/h after erasing DTC to check if
Condition ABS warning lamp goes off.

ABS motor power supply inspection
Check
after repair
38C-30
38C
DF184
Current or Solenoid valve relay
History
DTC If ABS control unit detects the fault in solenoid valve relay circuit, drive the
Detecting vehicle with the speed over 30 km/h after erasing DTC to check if ABS warn-
Condition ing lamp goes off.

Check
after repair
38C-31
38C
DF123
Current or ABS warning lamp (brake switch)
History
DTC If ABS control unit detects open circuit of stop lamp switch, drive the ve-
Detecting hicle with the speed over 30 km/h after erasing DTC to check if ABS warning
Condition lamp goes off.
Brake switch inspection

Check voltage of ABS control unit E54 terminal No. 20.
Specified value: Approx. 12 V (depressing brake pedal), Approx. 0 V (releasing brake pedal)
If fault is detected, repair the related circuit.
Check
after repair
38C-32
38C
DF021
Current or Battery voltage
History
DTC If the battery voltage from control unit is over 16.8 V or below 9.6 V, drive
Detecting the vehicle with the speed over 30 km/h after erasing DTC to check if ABS
Condition warning lamp goes off.

ABS control unit ignition power supply and battery voltage
Check voltage between ABS C/U E54 connector terminal No. 18, 2, 3 and body.
Check
after repair
38C-33
38C
DF
Current or ECU MALFUNCTION (control unit malfunction)
History
DTC
Detecting If the calculation function of control unit is defective
Condition

Check
after repair
38C-34
No Vdiag: 00 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - CONFORMITY CHECK
38C
Read the configuration and DTC with diagnosis device.

Notes
Perform the conformity test and judge the status according to the reference value.
Main Status & Parameter
Procedure Label No. Index label Status & Parameter description

1 PR002 Wheel speed sensor - FR/LH It displays the wheel speed calculated by
FR/LH wheel speed sensor.
2 PR001 Wheel speed sensor - FR/RH It displays the wheel speed calculated by
FR/RH wheel speed sensor.
3 PR004 Wheel speed sensor - RR/LH It displays the wheel speed calculated by
RR/LH wheel speed sensor.
4 PR003 Wheel speed sensor - RR/RH It displays the wheel speed calculated by
RR/RH wheel speed sensor.
5 PR069 Battery voltage It displays the battery voltage supplied to
ABS C/U.
38C-35
38C

Notes
All signals
Procedure Label No. Index label Status & Parameter description

1 PR002 Wheel speed sensor - FR/LH It displays the wheel speed calculated by
FR/LH wheel speed sensor.
2 PR001 Wheel speed sensor - FR/RH It displays the wheel speed calculated by
FR/RH wheel speed sensor.
3 PR004 Wheel speed sensor - RR/LH It displays the wheel speed calculated by
RR/LH wheel speed sensor.
4 PR003 Wheel speed sensor - RR/RH It displays the wheel speed calculated by
RR/RH wheel speed sensor.
5 PR069 Battery voltage It displays the battery voltage supplied to
ABS C/U.
6 ET045 ABS inlet solenoid - FR/LH It displays the status of FR/LH inlet solenoid.
7 ET046 ABS outlet solenoid - FR/LH It displays the status of FR/LH outlet solenoid.
8 ET043 ABS inlet solenoid - FR/RH It displays the status of FR/RH inlet solenoid.
9 ET044 ABS outlet solenoid - FR/RH It displays the status of FR/RH outlet solenoid.
10 ET047 ABS inlet solenoid - RR/RH It displays the status of RR/RH inlet solenoid.
11 ET048 ABS outlet solenoid - RR/LH It displays the status of RR/RH outlet solenoid.
12 ET049 ABS inlet solenoid - RR/LH It displays the status of RR/LH inlet solenoid.
13 ET050 ABS outlet solenoid - RR/LH It displays the status of RR/LH outlet solenoid.
14 ET100 Actuator relay It displays the status of actuator relay.
15 ET041 Motor relay It displays the status of motor relay.
16 ET074 Brake switch It displays ON when depressing brake pedal.
17 ET064 ABS fail signal It displays ON if ABS fail is detected.
18 ET063 EBD fail signal It displays ON if EBD fail is detected.
19 ET018 ABS signal It displays ON when ABS operates.
20 ET052 EBD signal It displays ON when EBD operates.
38C-36
No Vdiag: 00 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - STATUS & PARAMETER LIST
38C
Index No. Index name

PR002 Wheel speed sensor - FR/LH
PR001 Wheel speed sensor - FR/RH
PR004 Wheel speed sensor - RR/LH
PR003 Wheel speed sensor - RR/RH
PR002 Battery voltage
ET045 ABS inlet solenoid - FR/LH
ET046 ABS outlet solenoid - FR/LH
ET043 ABS inlet solenoid - FR/RH
ET044 ABS outlet solenoid - FR/RH
ET047 ABS inlet solenoid - RR/RH
ET048 ABS outlet solenoid - RR/LH
ET049 ABS inlet solenoid - RR/LH
ET100 Actuator relay
ET041 Motor relay
ET074 Brake switch
ET064 ABS fail signal
ET063 EBD fail signal
ET018 ABS signal
ET052 EBD signal
38C-37
No Vdiag: 00 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - STATUS & PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
38C
PR002 Wheel speed sensor - FR/LH
Note It displays the wheel speed calculated by FR/LH wheel speed sensor.

FR LH wheel speed sensor power supply inspection
Check
after repair
38C-38
38C
PR002 Wheel speed sensor - FR/RH
Note It displays the wheel speed calculated by FR/RH wheel speed sensor.

Check
after repair
38C-39
38C
PR004 Wheel speed sensor - RR/LH
Note It displays the wheel speed calculated by RR/LH wheel speed sensor.

Check
after repair
38C-40
38C
PR003 Wheel speed sensor - RR/RH
Note It displays the wheel speed calculated by RR/RH wheel speed sensor.

Check
after repair
38C-41
38C
PR002 Battery voltage
Note It displays the battery voltage supplied to ABS C/U.

Check
after repair
38C-42
38C
ET045 ABS inlet solenoid - FR/LH
Note It displays the status of FR/LH inlet solenoid.

Specified value: Continuity should exist (approx. 0¥Ø)
Check
after repair
38C-43
38C
ET046 ABS outlet solenoid - FR/LH
Note It displays the status of FR/LH outlet solenoid.

Check
after repair
38C-44
38C
ET043 ABS inlet solenoid - FR/RH
Note It displays the status of FR/RH inlet solenoid.

Check
after repair
38C-45
38C
ET044 ABS outlet solenoid - FR/RH
Note It displays the status of FR/RH outlet solenoid.

Check
after repair
38C-46
38C
ET047 ABS inlet solenoid - RR/RH
Note It displays the status of RR/RH inlet solenoid.

Check
after repair
38C-47
38C
Note It displays the status of RR/LH outlet solenoid.

Check
after repair
38C-48
38C
ET049 ABS inlet solenoid - RR/LH
Note It displays the status of RR/LH inlet solenoid.

Check
after repair
38C-49
38C
Note It displays the status of RR/LH outlet solenoid.

Check
after repair
38C-50
38C
ET100 Actuator relay
ON when ignition switch is ON

Note
OFF when ignition switch is OFF

Check
after repair
38C-51
38C
ET041 Motor relay
ON when ABS operates

Note
OFF when ABS does not operate
ABS motor power supply inspection

Check
after repair
38C-52
38C
ET074 Brake switch
ON when depressing brake pedal

Note
OFF when releasing brake pedal
Brake switch inspection

Check voltage of ABS control unit E54 terminal No. 20.
Specified value: Approx. 12 V when depressing brake pedal
Approx. 0 V when releasing brake pedal
If a fault is detected, repair the related circuit.
Check
after repair
38C-53
38C
ET064 ABS fail signal
Note It displays ON if ABS fail is detected.
After checking DTC, perform the diagnosis according to DTC.
Check
after repair
38C-54
38C
ET063 EBD fail signal
Note It displays ON if EBD fail is detected.
After checking DTC, perform the diagnosis according to DTC.
Check
after repair
38C-55
38C
ET018 ABS signal
Note It displays ON when ABS operates.
It displays the condition of ABS operation.
Check
after repair
38C-56
38C
ET052 EBD signal
Note It displays ON when EBD operates.
It displays the condition of EBD operation.
Check
after repair
38C-57
No Vdiag: 00 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - ACTIVE TEST LIST
38C
Subfunction Index No. Index label

RZ001 Fault memory
AC004 ABS solenoid - FR/RH
AC003 ABS solenoid - FR/LH
ABS control
AC005 ABS solenoid - RR/LH
AC006 ABS solenoid - RR/RH
AC001 ABS motor
38C-58
No Vdiag: 00 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - ACTIVE TEST DESCRIPTION
38C
AC004 ABS solenoid - FR/RH

AC003 ABS solenoid - FR/LH
AC005 ABS solenoid - RR/LH
AC006 ABS solenoid - RR/RH
Note There should be no current or historic failure record.
Perform the active test while the ignition is in ON position.

It operates as below if selecting OK.
Solenoid UP KEEP DOWN

ABS inlet solenoid OFF ON ON
ABS outlet solenoid OFF OFF ON (Note)
(Note) It turns OFF after 1 or 2 seconds.

NOTICE: It closes when ABS inlet solenoid is ON and opens when ABS outlet solenoid is ON.
Check
after repair
38C-59
38C
AC001 ABS motor

ABS motor and actuator relay are ON after selecting OK.
Solenoid ON OFF
ABS motor ON OFF
ABS actuator ON ON
Check
after repair
38C-60
No Vdiag: 00 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - CHECK BY SYMPTOMS
38C
Refer to the “Check by symptoms” after completing the inspection using the diagnostic
NOTES device.
ABS control unit
It cannot communicate with ABS control unit Chart 1
Check
after repair
38C-61
No Vdiag: 00 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - CHECK BY SYMPTOMS
38C
CHART 1 Cannot communicate with ABS control unit
Notes Use DDL2 (similar to KWP2000) communication protocol.
Check if all LEDs (4 EA) of CAN adapter are ON.

If necessary, disconnect the CAN adapter and reconnect it again. If the fault still exists, contact
the call center.
Check the continuity of ABS diagnosis line.
Check continuity between ABS C/U E54 connector terminal No. 11 and diagnosis connect E6
Check
after repair
38C-62
TDB COMBINATION METER
83A
1. Application
Vehicle type: SM3 06 MY ECU name: Combination meter

Function: Combination meter (instrument panel) N Vdiag: 00

Diagnosis manual
Wiring diagram
Diagnostic device
CLIP

Multi-meter
3. Preparation
Procedure
83A-1
83A
Failure:

considered.
For the historic failure, note the displayed fault and perform the diagnosis referring to the diagnosis
triggering conditions.
Perform the prescribed procedures on the note and perform the basic inspection as follows if the fault
is not detected.

Conformity check
In this step:
inspection.
Refer to the corresponding diagnosis section if the status does not operate correctly or the parameter
is out of tolerance range.

Process customer complaint according to the guideline if the check using the diagnostic device is
normal but fault persists.
83A-2
83A

charge and fuse.

sheet.
technical bulletin)
Connect CLIP.
Connect ECU to No
communication.
Yes
Trouble diagnosis
Malfunction is No
Check conformity
detected.
Yes
persists completed
Yes
persists completed
Yes

83A-3
83A
Wiring inspection
Precaution
Visual inspection
Manual inspection
Check the related harness connectors for poor contact by shaking connectors lightly or pressurizing
them for better tightness.
83A-4
83A
When performing the work related to parts, always observe the safety instructions to prevent personal injury.
z If the diagnosis should be done with the engine running, always connect the exhaust ventilation
device.

83A-5
83A
Combination meter description

The instrument panel has the functions as below:
z Analog pointer function (speedometer, tachometer, fuel indicator, engine coolant temperature gauge)
z Various warning lamps and indicators
z Digital LCD function (odometer, 2-mode trip odometer, AT shift indicator)
z BCM function, various signal transferring functions, and CAN communication function
Feature of combination meter
Combination meter for the vehicle with gasoline engine
Combination meter for the vehicle with diesel engine
83A-6
83A
Various warning lamps and indicators
Icons and characteristics are as below:
Warning lamp Icon Color **Note1 QG engine K9K engine

Turn signal lamp G X X
High beam L X X
Air bag R X X
Seat belt R X X
Door ajar R X X
Rear fog lamp Y X X
Trunk ajar R X X
Brake R X X
ABS Y X X
Engine CHECK Y X X
Pre-heater Y - X
High water tempera-
R - X
ture warning lamp
Coolant level Y - X
Oil R X X
Battery R X X
Fuel Y X X
A/T Y X X
SNOW Y X X
Anti-theft R X X
Note 1: Color naming is same with the wiring harness identification.
83A-7
83A
Combination meter LCD panel
AT position indicator: P, R, N, D, 3, 2 and 1.
Odometer displaying range: 0 ~ 999999 km

Odometer displaying unit: 1 km
Odometer display does not increase over 999999 km.
The odometer data is stored in the control unit (EEPROM).
Trip odometer displaying range: 0 ~ 9999.9 km

Trip odometer displaying unit: 0.1 km
Trip odometer display is changed to 0.0 km when the trip distance goes over 9999.9 km.
The trip odometer data is stored in the control unit (RAM).
It is reset to 0.0 km when disconnecting the battery cable or pressing the reset knob.
Using trip odometer
Driving distance: 432.1 km
Press the reset knob for more than 0.8 seconds
Trip A: Reset to 0.0 km
Press the reset knob for less than 0.8 seconds
Changed to Trip B mode
83A-8
83A
Timer control function of combination meter
z Rear defogger control

The rear defogger operates for 15 minutes when turning on the rear defogger switch with the igni-
tion switch ON.
z Tail lamp control

Tail lamp comes on and off according to the tail lamp switch signal.
Tail lamp relay is off when turning off the key-in switch and driver’s door switch with the light switch
ON.
z Turn signal lamp/Hazard warning lamp control

Turn signal lamp is controlled by the turn signal lamp switch signal.
Hazard warning lamp blinks when receiving the collision signal or hazard warning lamp signal.
Hazard warning lamp blinks twice when locking the doors with remote controller or relocking
(automatically) the doors.
Hazard warning lamp blinks once when unlocking the doors with remote controller.
Hazard warning lamp blinks for 30 seconds with 1 Hz of frequency when operating panic function
with remote controller.
Hazard warning lamp blinks for 30 seconds with 1 Hz of frequency when operating anti-theft function.
Hazard warning lamp blinks once when entering into the remote controller ID registration mode.
z Buzzer control
Key-in alarm:
Key-in alarm sounds with 2 kHz of frequency when the key-in switch is ON and driver’s door switch
is in open position with the ignition switch OFF.
Seat belt alarm:
Seat belt alarm sounds for a specific period when driving over a specified speed (set in combina-
tion meter control unit) while the seat beat switch is ON (not fastened).
It stops when the vehicle speed is lower than 5 km/h than the specified speed.
** Trouble diagnosis – Refer to the "Write configuration & programming".
Vehicle speed sensitive door lock alarm:
Warning buzzer sounds for approx. 0.5 seconds while driving when the auto door lock function is
activated.
Turn signal lamp/hazard warning lamp buzzer:
Buzzer sounds when the ignition switch is defective or the turn signal lamp switch or hazard warn-
ing lamp switch is turned on while the ignition switch is in OFF position.
Over-speed alarm:
Warning buzzer sounds when the vehicle speed exceeds 120 km/h and stops when the vehicle
speed goes below 115 km/h.
z Room lamp timer control

Room lamps and key hole lamp come on when turning on the driver’s door switch.
Room lamps and key hole lamp are dimmed down by timer when turning the driver’s door switch to
OFF from ON.
Room lamps and key hole lamp are turned on and off according to door switch operation.
83A-9
83A
z Room lamp battery saver relay control

To prevent the battery from discharging, the combination meter turns off the battery saver relay
after 30 minutes from when turning on the room lamps while the ignition switch and key-in switch are
OFF.
z Shift lock solenoid control

The A/T selector lever cannot be moved to any other positions from “P” when the detent switch (P-
range detection) is ON and the brake switch is not in ON position.
The A/T selector lever cannot be moved to “R” from “N” when the vehicle speed exceeds 14 km/h.
The A/T selector lever can be moved to “P” from “N” for 3 minutes after turning the ignition switch to
OFF from ON.
z Power window/folding mirror residual voltage control ** Refer to EL-Power Window wiring diagram.
The power window relay is activated for approx. 30 seconds after turning the ignition switch to OFF
from ON.
Other functions of combination meter
z A/C signal transferring function ** Refer to EL - AC wiring diagram.

It receives the A/C switch signal and blower switch signal from A/C controller and transfers them to
engine control unit.
z Engine coolant temperature output function ** Refer to EL-AC wiring diagram.

It sends the voltage signal to A/C control unit according to the engine coolant temperature informa-
tion through CAN network.
below 55°C: 12 V
over 55°C: 0 V
z Vehicle speed (2-pulse) output function ** Refer to EL-EL-Automatic Transmission wiring diagram.
It coverts the vehicle speed signals from ABS control unit or transmission vehicle speed sensor to 2-
pulse signals and then sends them to TCM.
z Remote control system control ** Refer to Keyless & Smart.
z Immobilizer control ** Refer to Keyless & Smart.
z Door lock control ** Refer to Keyless & Smart.
83A-10
83A
CAN communication function in combination meter

Timer control functions
Combination meter communicates with ECUs using CAN communication.

T : Send R: Receive
Combination
Signal QG ECM K9K ECM TCM
meter C/U
Engine speed signal T T R
Engine coolant temperature T T R
Engine CHECK warning lamp (MIL) signal T T R
A/T CHECK lamp signal T R
A/T position indicator signal T R
Vehicle speed signal R T
A/C request signal R R T
Blower motor status signal R R T
Engine/AT integrated control signal R R T
T T R
Rear defogger switch signal R T
Tail lamp request signal R T
Fuel gauge R T
Reverse switch (Note 1) R T
Neutral switch (Note 1) R T
SNOW mode signal T R
Note 1: It only applies to K9K engine.
83A-11
83A
Gauge & Hazard Warning Lamp Wiring Diagram
83A-12
83A
Wiring Diagram EL/Gage-01
83A-13
83A
Wiring Diagram EL/Gage-01
83A-14
83A
Wiring Diagram EL/Warning light-01
83A-15
83A
83A-16
83A
83A-17
83A
Tail Lamp Wiring Diagram
83A-18
83A
Wiring Diagram EL/Tail lamp-01
83A-19
83A
Wiring Diagram EL/Tail lamp-02
83A-20
83A
Hazard Warning Lamp & Turn Signal Lamp Wiring Diagram
83A-21
83A
Wiring Diagram EL/Turn signal lamp-01
83A-22
83A
Wiring Diagram EL/Turn signal lamp-02
83A-23
83A
Rear Defogger Wiring Diagram
83A-24
83A
Wiring Diagram EL/Defogger-01
83A-25
83A
Wiring Diagram EL/Defogger-02
83A-26
83A
Wiring Diagram EL/Warning light (Buzzer)-01
83A-27
83A
Wiring Diagram EL/Warning light (Buzzer)-02
83A-28
83A
Wiring Diagram EL/Room lamp-01
83A-29
83A
Wiring Diagram AT/Device
83A-30
83A
Wiring Diagram EL/CAN communication
83A-31
83A
Wiring Diagram EL/Meter (Diagnosis)-02
83A-32
No Vdiag: 00 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - READ AND WRITE CONFIGURATION
83A
Required device
RSM CLIP Mater CD ver 2
Various configuration settings for combination meter

The following items should be set to use the various control functions of combination meter correctly.
Make sure to record the following values before replacing the combination meter so that they can be
set to new combination meter correctly.
Setting
Configu- Configura- Possible value (new
Setting item Others
ration tion check setting values combina-
tion meter)
CF164 LC081 Vehicle speed input source ABS, Transmission

(Note 1) transmission
CF160 LC076 Over speed alarm WITH, WITHOUT WITH For Middle
East
CF158 LC064 Seat belt reminder buzzer WITH, WITHOUT WITH
CF161 LC078 Auto door lock while driving WITH, WITHOUT WITHOUT
(Note 2)
CF165 LC082 Double step - Door unlock (Note 3) WITH, WITHOUT WITHOUT For Export
CF169 LC086 With engine immobilizer (Note 4) YES, NO NO
CF170 LC087 Without engine immobilizer YES, NO YES
(Note 4)
CF162 LC079 Multi-remote entry WITH, WITHOUT WITH
CF166 LC083 Seat belt warning - vehicle speed 10,15,20 10 Km/h
CF167 LC084 Seat belt warning - operating time 0,30,60,90,120 60 sec
CF168 LC085 Auto door lock - vehicle speed 8, 40 40 km/h
CF163 LC080 Transmission (Note 5) Manual/Auto- Manual
-
matic
(Note 1) It should be set to ABS for the vehicle equipped with ABS.
(Note 2) It can be set manually. (The setting value is changed when pressing the central door lock
switch for more than 5 seconds with the ignition switch ON.)
(Note 3) This function is for export, so set it to WITHOUT for domestic vehicle.
(Note 4) It is to set the value to the vehicle equipped with immobilizer. Refer to K9K service manual.
(Note 5) If Manual is set to the vehicle equipped with automatic transaxle, the selector lever information
is not displayed.
83A-33
83A
Reading the configuration
z Connect the combination meter control unit to data link connector on CLIP.
z Select the repair mode.
z Monitor the setting value with read configuration function.
83A-34
83A
Changing the configuration
z Select Write configuration.
z Select the item to be set.
z Check the vehicle setting, select the correct value and select OK.
z Check if the set items have been changed in Read configuration mode.
z The system should be initialized in other configuration function or the ignition switch should be
turned OFF and ON again to store the set configuration to the combination meter C/U (EEPROM).
z Make sure that the set value is correct in Read configuration mode.
83A-35
No Vdiag: 00 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - DTC LIST
83A
DTC label DTC Items Remarks

DF007 9401 Fuel gauge sensor circuit
DF027 9404 Turn signal lamp circuit - RH
DF028 9405 Turn signal lamp circuit - LH
DF031 9407 Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch
DF041 9408 Rear defogger relay circuit
DF044 940A Tail lamp relay circuit
DF043 940B Power window relay circuit
DF045 940C Battery saver relay circuit
DF050 9414 Engine coolant temperature output circuit
DF051 9416 Vehicle speed output circuit 1
DF052 9417 Vehicle speed output circuit 2 - 8-pulse
DF025 9403 Control unit - EEPROM
DF030 9406 Engine immobilizer
DF046 940D Door lock relay circuit
DF047 940E Driver’s door unlock relay circuit Refer to Keyless & Smart
DF048 940F Other door unlock relay circuit section for trouble diag-
nosis description.
DF042 9411 Alarm relay circuit
DF049 9412 Air bag collision circuit
DF053 9418 Anti-theft relay circuit
83A-36
83A
DF007
Fuel gauge sensor circuit
Current or
History CO: Open CC.0: Short to ground
DTC This fault can be detected only when the ignition switch is in ON position.
Detecting CO: If the resistance of fuel gauge sensor is over 100Ω Ω
Condition CC.0: If the resistance of fuel gauge sensor is below 2Ω Ω
Inspect the fuel gauge sensor.

Remove the fuel gauge sensor and measure the resistance of it.
Fuel F position (approx. 52 ) - approx. 6Ω
Fuel 3/4 position (approx. 37 ) - approx. 18Ω
Fuel E position (approx. 5.5 ) - approx. 80Ω
If necessary, replace the defective component with new one.
Check continuity between meter control unit and fuel gauge sensor.
Disconnect M30 connector and B28 connector.
M30 connector terminal No.4 and B28 connector terminal No.1 - approx. 0Ω
M30 connector terminal No.3 and B28 connector terminal No.2 - approx. 0Ω
M30 connector terminal No.3, 4 and body - Continuity should not exist
Check the fuel gauge circuit for short to power supply.
Disconnect the fuel gauge unit connector and the combination meter connector.
Check the voltage between meter control unit M30 connector terminal No. 3, 4 and ground.
Specified value: The voltage should not be detected. The control circuit is short to power
supply circuit if the battery voltage is detected.
Perform the fault detection procedure and check the malfunction does not occur again.
Check
Check the possible causes related to this failure to make sure there is no fault.
after repair
83A-37
83A
DF019
Battery voltage
Current or
History 3.DEF : Abnormal voltage
DTC
Detecting 3.DEF : If the battery voltage is over 16 V
Condition
Measure the battery voltage.

Start the engine and measure the battery voltage and charging voltage.
Specified value - approx. 13 V
Check the power supply and ground circuits of control unit.
Check the voltage between the control unit M33 terminal No. 58 and terminal No. 14, 69, 70:
Power supply voltage
Check the voltage between the control unit M33 terminal No. 59 and terminal No. 71:
Check
after repair
83A-38
83A
DF025
Control unit - EEPROM
Current or
History DEF : Internal circuit fault
DTC
Detecting DEF : If the EEPROM set in control unit is failed.
Condition

Erase the fault. If the fault cannot be erased,
replace the combination meter.
Check
after repair
83A-39
83A
DF027
Turn signal lamp circuit - RH
Current or
History CO: Open CC.0: Short to ground CC.1: Short to power
When operating the RH turn signal lamp,

DTC CO: If the RH turn signal lamp consumes less voltage than estimated
Detecting (only for 21 W turn signal lamp),
Condition CC.0: If the RH turn signal lamp control circuit is short to ground,
CC.1: If the RH turn signal lamp control circuit is short to power
Check RH turn signal lamp bulbs and each turn signal lamp connector for tightening.
Replace the burnt bulb and tighten the connector correctly.
Check the control voltage of RH turn signal lamp control circuit.
Voltage of control unit M33 connector terminal No. 79 and 80
When controlling RH turn signal lamp - approx. 0 V and 12 V alternatively
Others - approx. 0 V
Check the continuity of RH turn signal lamp control circuit.
Disconnect the meter control unit, rear combination lamp, front turn signal lamp and side turn
signal lamp connectors.
Check the continuity between the control unit M33 connector terminal No. 79 or 80 and each
turn signal lamp connector.
Specified value: Continuity should exist.
Check the RH turn signal lamp control circuit for short to ground and short to power.
Check the continuity between the control unit M33 connector terminal No. 79 or 80 and ground.
Specified value: Continuity should not exist.
The control line is short to ground if there is continuity.
Check the voltage between the control unit M33 connector terminal No. 79 or 80 and ground.
Specified value: The voltage should not be detected.
It is short to power if the battery voltage is detected.
Check
after repair
83A-40
83A
DF028
Turn signal lamp circuit - LH
Current or
History CO: Open CC.0: Short to ground CC.1: Short to power
When operating the LH turn signal lamp,

DTC CO: If the LH turn signal lamp consumes less voltage than estimated
Detecting (only for 21 W turn signal lamp),
Condition CC.0: If the LH turn signal lamp control circuit is short to ground,
CC.1: If the LH turn signal lamp control circuit is short to power
Check LH turn signal lamp bulbs and each turn signal lamp connector for tightening.
Replace the burnt bulb and tighten the connector correctly.
Check the control voltage of LH turn signal lamp control circuit.
When controlling LH turn signal lamp - approx. 0 V and 12 V alternatively
Check the continuity of LH turn signal lamp control circuit.
Check the continuity between the control unit M33 connector terminal No. 77 or 78 and each
turn signal lamp connector.
Check the LH turn signal lamp control circuit for short to ground and short to power.
Check the continuity between the control unit M33 connector terminal No. 77 or 78 and ground.
The control line is short to ground if there is continuity.
It is short to power if the battery voltage is detected.
Check
after repair
83A-41
83A
DF031
Current or PNP switch circuit
History
DTC
Detecting This is the data only for K9K vehicle. ** Refer to K9K service manual.
Condition
Check
after repair
83A-42
83A
DF041
Rear defogger relay circuit
Current or
History CC.1: Short to power
DTC When operating the rear defogger relay

Detecting
CC.1: If the rear defogger relay control consumes more voltage than estimated
Condition
Check the control voltage of rear defogger relay.

Voltage of control unit M33 connector terminal No. 61
When operating the rear defogger relay - approx. 1 V
Check the rear defogger relay control circuit for short to power.
Disconnect the rear defogger relay, rear de-icer relay and combination meter.
Check the voltage between the control unit M33 connector terminal No. 61 and ground.
The control circuit is short to power supply circuit if the battery voltage is detected.
Check
after repair
83A-43
83A
DF044
Tail lamp relay circuit
Current or
DTC When operating the tail lamp

Detecting
CC.1: If the tail lamp relay control consumes more voltage than estimated
Condition
Check the control voltage of tail lamp relay.

When depressing the tail lamp switch - approx. 1 V
Check the tail lamp relay control circuit for short to power.
Disconnect the tail lamp relay and combination meter connectors.
Check
after repair
83A-44
83A
DF043
Power window relay circuit
Current or
DTC When operating the power window relay

Detecting
CC.1: If the power window relay control consumes more voltage than estimated
Condition
Check the control voltage of power window relay.

For 30 seconds after turning the ignition from ON to OFF - approx. 1 V
After 30 seconds from when turning the ignition from ON to OFF - Battery voltage
Check the power window relay control circuit for short to power.
Disconnect the power window relay, folding mirror relay and combination meter connectors.
Check
after repair
83A-45
83A
DF045
Battery saver relay circuit
Current or
History CC.1 : Short to power
DTC When operating the battery saver relay

Detecting
CC.1: If the battery saver relay control consumes more voltage than estimated
Condition
Check the control voltage of the battery saver relay.

Ignition ON - approx. 1 V
After 30 minutes from when turning the room lamp ON with ignition OFF and key-in switch OFF -
approx. 12 V
Check the battery saver relay control circuit for short to power.
Disconnect the battery saver relay and combination meter connectors.
Check
after repair
83A-46
83A
DF050
Engine coolant temperature output circuit
Current or
DTC
CC.1: If the engine coolant temperature output circuit consumes more volt-
Detecting
age than estimated
Condition
Check the signal of the engine coolant temperature output circuit.

Specified value: Coolant temperature is below approx. 55°C - approx. 12 V
Specified value: Coolant temperature is over approx. 55°C - approx. 0 V
Check the engine coolant temperature output circuit for short to power.
Remove the meter control unit and automatic A/C controller connectors.
Check
after repair
83A-47
83A
DF051
Vehicle speed output circuit 1 (2-pulse)
Current or
History CC.1 : Short to power
DTC When driving the vehicle

Detecting
CC.1: If the vehicle speed output circuit consumes more voltage than estimated
Condition
Check the signal of vehicle speed output (2-pulse) circuit.

Specified value: When the vehicle is moving 0 V ~ 5 V alternatively
Check the vehicle speed output (2-pulse) circuit for short to power.
Disconnect the meter control unit and TCM connectors.
Check
after repair
83A-48
83A
DF052
Current or Vehicle speed output circuit 2 (8-pulse)
History
DTC
Detecting CC.1: If the vehicle speed output circuit consumes more voltage than estimated
Condition
Replace the combination meter.
Check
after repair
83A-49
83A

Notes
Proce- Label Status or Reference value

Trouble diagnosis
dure No. Parameter and notes
1 PR020 Vehicle speed 1 Vehicle speed accord- The data detected from the vehicle speed
(Note 1) ing to driving condition sensor in transmission is displayed.
2 PR021 Vehicle speed 2 Vehicle speed accord- If this vehicle speed is faulty, perform
(Note 1) ing to driving condition trouble diagnosis for ABS C/U.
(Note 1) If the vehicle speed input source is ABS in Read configuration mode, vehicle speed 1 does not
output the data. And, if it is Transmission, vehicle speed 2 does not output the data.
83A-50
83A

Notes Perform the conformity test and judge the status according to the reference value.
Condition: Ignition switch ON, Engine not running
Display unit
Proce- Label
Status or Parameter Reference value and notes Trouble diagnosis
dure No.
ET116 Door warning lamp ON when door is open
ET199 Glow plug warning lamp ON when glow plug is ON Data only for K9K
ET219 Engine coolant level indi- ON when the indicator is ON Data only for K9K
cator
ET200 Anti-theft indicator ON when the indicator is ON
ET460 Engine coolant tempera- ON when coolant temperature
ture warning lamp is excessively high
ET220 Seat belt warning lamp ON when seat belt is not fastened
ET115 Malfunction indicator lamp ON when MIL is ON
(MIL)
ET221 SNOW mode indicator ON when SNOW switch is ON
ET183 Turn signal lamp - LH ON when turning left
ET184 Turn signal lamp - RH ON when turning right
ET114 Fuel warning lamp ON when fuel warning lamp is ON
ET121 AT CHECK warning lamp ON when AT CHECK warning
lamp is ON
ET202 Oil pressure warning lamp ON when oil pressure warning
lamp is ON
ET010 Battery charge ON when battery warning lamp
is ON
PR020 Vehicle speed 1 (Note 1) Output according to driving speed Vehicle speed sensor
on transmission
PR021 Vehicle speed 2 (Note 1) Output according to driving speed Vehicle speed, ABS
83A-51
83A

Driving information
Proce- Label
dure No.
ET002 IGN ON switch ON
ET216 Reset knob switch ON when pressing reset knob
ET180 LH turn signal lamp ON when LH turn signal lamp switch
is ON
ET179 RH turn signal lamp ON when RH turn signal lamp switch
is ON
ET122 Inhibitor P switch ON in P-range, OFF in other ranges
ET123 Inhibitor N switch ON in N-range, OFF in other ranges
ET186 Rear defogger switch ON when pressing rear defogger
switch
ET187 Detention switch ON in P-range
ET310 Air conditioner switch ON when pressing air conditioner
switch
ET189 Blower switch ON when pressing blower switch
ET062 Seat belt warning lamp ON when seat belt is not fastened
ET096 Oil pressure switch ON when the oil pressure is below
specified level
ET217 Stop lamp switch ON when depressing brake pedal
ET194 Hazard warning lamp ON when pressing hazard warning
switch lamp switch
ET195 Trunk room lamp switch ON when trunk is open
ET196 Hood switch ON when hood is open
ET218 Tail lamp switch ON when tail lamp switch is ON
ET205 Reverse switch ON when reverse gear is engaged Data only for K9K
ET204 Park/Neutral Position ON when gear is in Neutral Data only for K9K
(PNP) Switch
83A-52
83A

Driving information
Proce- Label Trouble

Status or Parameter Reference value and notes
dure No. diagnosis
ET194 Hazard warning lamp switch ON when pressing hazard warn-
ing lamp switch
ET180 LH turn signal lamp ON when LH turn signal lamp
switch is ON
ET352 LH turn signal lamp control ON and OFF alternatively when
LH turn signal lamp switch is ON
PR019 LH turn signal lamp - current Change to 0~4,500mA when LH
turn signal lamp operates
ET179 RH turn signal lamp ON when RH turn signal lamp
switch is ON
ET351 RH turn signal lamp control ON and OFF alternatively when
RH turn signal lamp switch is ON
PR018 RH turn signal lamp - current Change to 0~4,500mA when RH
turn signal lamp operates
ET187 Detention switch ON in P-range
83A-53
83A

Timer control
Proce- Label
dure No.
ET186 Rear defogger switch ON when pressing rear defogger
switch
ET140 Rear defogger control ON while rear defogger relay is
controlled
ET053 Driver’s door Driver’s door locked - LOCK
Driver’s door unlocked - UNLOCK
ET191 All door switches All doors closed - OFF
ET197 Key-in switch ON when the key is inserted
ET218 Tail lamp switch ON when tail lamp switch is ON
ET224 Tail lamp relay control ON while tail lamp relay ON is con-
trolled
ET223 Battery saver relay con- ON while battery saver relay ON
trol is controlled
ET062 Seat belt warning lamp ON while seat belt is not fastened
PR020 Vehicle speed 1 (Note 1) Output according to driving speed Vehicle speed sensor
PR021 Vehicle speed 2 (Note 1) Output according to driving speed Vehicle speed, ABS
83A-54
83A

CAN diagnosis
Proce- Label
dure No.
ET642 CAN CIRCUIT 1 - TX OK, UNKOWN
ET171 CAN CIRC 2 - ECM OK, UNKOWN
ET172 CAN CIRC3 - TCM OK, UNKOWN
83A-55
83A

ET002 IGN ON switch
ET010 Battery charge
ET055 Driver’s door
ET062 Seat belt warning lamp
ET096 Oil pressure switch
ET102 IGN ON switch
ET104 Hazard warning lamp switch
ET106 Rear defogger switch
ET114 Fuel warning lamp
ET115 Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
ET116 Door warning lamp
ET121 AT CHECK warning lamp
ET122 Inhibitor P switch
ET123 Inhibitor N switch
ET140 Rear defogger control
ET160 LH turn signal lamp
ET179 RH turn signal lamp
ET183 Turn signal lamp - LH
ET184 Turn signal lamp - RH
ET187 Detention switch
ET189 Blower switch
ET191 All door switches
ET195 Trunk room lamp switch
ET196 Hood switch
ET197 Key-in switch
ET199 Glow plug warning lamp
ET200 Anti-theft indicator
ET202 Oil pressure warning lamp
ET204 Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch
ET205 Reverse switch
ET216 Reset knob switch
ET216 Tail lamp switch
83A-56
83A

ET217 Stop lamp switch
ET219 Engine coolant level indicator
ET223 Battery saver relay control
ET224 Tail lamp relay control
ET310 Air conditioner switch
ET351 RH turn signal lamp control
ET352 LH turn signal lamp control
ET460 Engine coolant temperature warning lamp
PR018 RH turn signal lamp - current
PR019 LH turn signal lamp - current
PR020 Vehicle speed 1
ET642 CAN CIRCUIT 1 - TX
ET171 CAN CIRC 2 - ECM
ET172 CAN CIRC3 - TCM
83A-57
83A
ET002 IGN ON switch
IGN SW ON - ON
Note
IGN SW OFF - OFF
Check the voltage of control unit M33 connector terminal No. 57.
IGN SW ON - Battery voltage
IGN SW ACC or OFF - Ground voltage
If necessary, repair the related circuit.
Check
after repair
83A-58
83A
ET010 Battery charge
Battery charge lamp ON - ON

Note
Battery charge lamp OFF - OFF
Check the battery condition.

Engine running - Battery voltage
Others - Ground voltage
Check
after repair
83A-59
83A
Driver’s door locked - LOCK

Note
Driver’s door unlocked - UNLOCK
Driver’s door locked - approx. 11 V
Driver’s door unlocked - approx. 0 V
Check
after repair
83A-60
83A

Seat belt is fastened after IGN ON - OFF

Note
Seat belt is not fastened after IGN ON - ON
Seat belt is fastened - approx. 12 V
Check
after repair
83A-61
83A
ET096 Oil pressure switch

ET202 Oil pressure warning lamp
Oil pressure reaches specified level after starting engine - OFF

Note
No oil pressure before starting engine - ON
Oil pressure exceeds the specified level after starting engine - approx. 12 V
Oil pressure switch is OFF before starting engine - approx. 0 V
Check
after repair
83A-62
83A
When pressing the hazard warning lamp switch - ON

Note
Others - OFF
When pressing the hazard warning lamp switch - approx. 0 V
Check
after repair
83A-63
83A
When pressing the rear defogger switch - ON

Note
Others - OFF
When pressing the rear defogger switch - approx. 0 V
Check
after repair
83A-64
83A
Fuel in tank is approx. 9 liter after IGN ON - ON

Note
Others - OFF
Check the continuity between the control unit and fuel pump gauge unit.
Disconnect M30 connector and B28 connector.
M30 connector terminal No.4 and B28 connector terminal No.1 - Continuity should exist
M30 connector terminal No.3 and B28 connector terminal No.2 - Continuity should exist
Check the resistance of fuel pump gauge unit.
Resistance of fuel pump gauge terminal No.1 and 2
Fuel F position (approx. 52 ) - approx. 6Ω
Fuel E position (approx. 5.5 ) - approx. 80Ω
Check
after repair
83A-65
83A
ET115 Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) ON - ON

Note MIL OFF - OFF
** CAN signal: The combination meter displays the engine warning lamp signal of ECM.
Perform the diagnosis for engine control section.

Perform the diagnosis for CAN network.
Replace the combination meter if the fault stays.
Check
after repair
83A-66
83A
ET116 Door warning lamp
Any door is open - ON

Note
All doors are closed - OFF
Check the voltage of control unit M30 connector terminal No. 9 and 10.
All doors are closed - approx. 11 V
Any door is open - approx. 0 V
Check
after repair
83A-67
83A
ET121 A/T CHECK warning lamp
A/T CHECK warning lamp ON - ON

Note A/T CHECK warning lamp OFF - OFF
** CAN signal: The combination meter displays the A/T CHECK warning lamp signal of TCM.
Perform the diagnosis for TCM section.

Check
after repair
83A-68
83A
ET221 SNOW mode indicator
ON when SNOW switch is ON

Note OFF when SNOW switch is OFF
** CAN signal: The combination meter displays the SNOW switch signal of TCM.
Perform the diagnosis for TCM section.

Check
after repair
83A-69
83A
ET122 Inhibitor P switch
Selector lever in P range - ON

Note
Selector lever in ranges other than P - OFF
Selector lever in P range - Battery voltage
Selector lever in ranges other than P range - Ground voltage
Check
after repair
83A-70
83A
ET123 Inhibitor N switch
Selector lever in N range - ON

Note
Selector lever in ranges other than N - OFF
Selector lever in P range - Battery voltage
Selector lever in ranges other than P range - approx. 4.5 V
Check
after repair
83A-71
83A
ET140 Rear defogger control
While rear defogger is controlled - ON

Note
While rear defogger is not controlled - OFF
While rear defogger is controlled - approx. 1 V
While rear defogger is not controlled - Battery voltage
Check
after repair
83A-72
83A
ET179 RH turn signal lamp
RH turn signal lamp switch ON - ON

Note
RH turn signal lamp switch OFF - OFF
LH turn signal lamp switch ON - approx. 12 V
LH turn signal lamp switch OFF - approx. 0 V
Check
after repair
83A-73
83A
ET180 LH turn signal lamp
LH turn signal lamp switch ON - ON

Note
LH turn signal lamp switch OFF - OFF
LH turn signal lamp switch ON - approx. 12 V
LH turn signal lamp switch OFF - approx. 0 V
Check
after repair
83A-74
83A
ET184 Turn signal lamp - RH

When turning on RH turn signal lamp - ON and OFF

Note
Others - OFF
When controlling RH turn signal lamp - approx. 0 V and 12 V repeatedly
** NOTE: The turn signal lamp does not come on if both terminals (No. 79 and 80) are defective.
Check
after repair
83A-75
83A
ET183 Turn signal lamp - LH

When turning on LH turn signal lamp - ON and OFF

Note
Others - OFF
When controlling LH turn signal lamp - approx. 0 V and 12 V repeatedly
Check
after repair
83A-76
83A
ET187 Detention switch
Selector lever in P range - ON

Note
Selector lever in ranges other than P - OFF
Selector lever in P range - approx. 0 V
Selector lever in ranges other than P range - approx. 12 V
Check
after repair
83A-77
83A
ET189 Blower switch
Blower switch ON - ON
Note
Blower switch OFF - OFF
Blower switch ON - approx. 0 V
Blower switch OFF - approx. 12 V
Check the air conditioner controller if the fault stays.
Check
after repair
83A-78
83A
ET310 Air conditioner switch
Air conditioner switch ON - ON

Note
Air conditioner switch OFF - OFF
Air conditioner switch ON - approx. 0 V
Air conditioner switch OFF - approx. 12 V
Check the air conditioner controller if the fault stays.
Check
after repair
83A-79
83A
All doors are closed - OFF

Note
Any door is open - ON
All doors are closed - approx. 11 V
Check
after repair
83A-80
83A
Trunk open - ON
Note
Trunk closed - OFF
Trunk closed - approx. 11 V
Trunk open - approx. 1 V
Check
after repair
83A-81
83A
ET196 Hood switch
Hood open - ON
Note
Hood closed - OFF
Hood closed - approx. 11 V
Hood open - approx. 0 V
Check
after repair
83A-82
83A
ET197 Key-in switch
Key is in the ignition cylinder - ON

Note
Key is not in the ignition cylinder - OFF
Key is in the ignition cylinder - approx. 11 V
Key is not in the ignition cylinder - approx. 0 V
Check
after repair
83A-83
83A
ET199 Glow plug warning lamp
Note This is the data only for K9K. ** Refer to K9K diagnosis manual.
Check
after repair
83A-84
83A
ET200 Anti-theft indicator
Note It comes on and off according to the anti-theft indicator operating conditions.
If the anti-theft indicator is OFF while the ON condition is met,

Check the voltage of control unit M33 connector terminal No. 58, 59 and 60.
Specified value - Battery voltage
Check
after repair
83A-85
83A
ET204 Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch
Note This is the data only for K9K engine. ** Refer to K9K diagnosis manual.
Check
after repair
83A-86
83A
Check
after repair
83A-87
83A
ET216 Reset knob switch
Pressing reset knob - ON

Note
Others - OFF
If a fault is detected, replace the combination meter.
Check
after repair
83A-88
83A
ET217 Stop lamp switch
Depressing brake pedal - ON

Note
Releasing brake pedal - OFF
Depressing brake pedal - approx. 12 V
Releasing brake pedal - approx. 0 V
Check
after repair
83A-89
83A
Tail lamp switch ON - ON

Note
Tail lamp switch OFF - OFF
Tail lamp OFF - approx. 0 V
Tail lamp ON - approx. 12 V
Check
after repair
83A-90
83A
ET219 Engine coolant level indicator
Check
after repair
83A-91
83A
ET223 Battery saver relay control
After 30 minutes from when turning the room lamp ON with ignition OFF and
Note key-in switch OFF - OFF
Others - ON
After 30 minutes from when turning the room lamp ON with ignition OFF and key-in switch OFF -
approx. 12 V
Check
after repair
83A-92
83A
ET224 Tail lamp relay control
Tail lamp relay ON - ON

Note
Tail lamp relay OFF - OFF
Tail lamp relay ON - approx. 1 V
Others - Battery voltage
Check
after repair
83A-93
83A
ET460 Engine coolant temperature warning lamp
Engine coolant temperature warning lamp ON - ON

Note Engine coolant temperature warning lamp OFF - OFF
** CAN signal: Engine coolant temperature signal
Perform the diagnosis for ECM section.

Check
after repair
83A-94
83A
PR019 RH turn signal lamp - current
The current is changed between 0 and 4,500 mA when operating RH turn

Note
signal lamp.
Check
after repair
83A-95
83A
PR019 LH turn signal lamp - current
The current is changed between 0 and 4,500 mA when operating RH turn

Note
signal lamp.
Check
after repair
83A-96
83A
Note The data is outputted from the vehicle speed sensor installed in transmission.
Check the continuity between control unit and vehicle speed sensor.
Disconnect the control unit and vehicle speed sensor connectors.
Check the continuity between control unit M30 connector terminal No. 5 and vehicle speed
sensor terminal No. 1.
Continuity should exist.
Check the continuity between control unit M30 connector terminal No. 6 and vehicle speed
sensor terminal No. 2.
Inspect the vehicle speed sensor.
Check the output voltage while rotating the sprocket of vehicle speed sensor by hand.
Specified value - 0 ~ 5 V
If necessary, replace the vehicle speed sensor.
Check
after repair
83A-97
83A
Note Combination meter displays the vehicle speed from ABS control unit.
Check the continuity between control unit and vehicle speed sensor.
Disconnect the control unit and vehicle speed sensor connectors.
Check the continuity between control unit M30 connector terminal No. 7 and ABS C/U terminal No. 23.
Perform the diagnosis for ABS C/U.
Refer to ABS diagnosis manual.
Check
after repair
83A-98
83A
ET642 CAN CIRCT 1 - TX
It outputs UNKNOWN if the control unit does not generate TX signal for more
Note
than 2 seconds.
Perform the CAN network test.

Check
after repair
83A-99
83A
ET171 CAN CIRC 2 - ECM
It outputs UNKNOWN if the control unit does not receive RX signal from ECM
Note
for more than 2 seconds.

Check
after repair
83A-100
83A
ET172 CAN CIRC3 - TCM
It outputs UNKNOWN if the control unit does not receive RX signal from TCM
Note
for more than 2 seconds.

Check
after repair
83A-101
No Vdiag: 00 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - ACTIVE TEST LIST
83A
Subfunction QG ECM K9K ECM

Erase RZ001 Fault memory
AC009 Combination meter warning lamp
AC029 Combination meter - LCD
AC030 Engine coolant temperature gauge
Display
AC032 Tachometer
AC031 Speedometer
AC020 Fuel gauge
AC017 Turn signal lamp - LH
Other controls AC018 Turn signal lamp - RH
AC019 Selector lever lock
AC022 Rear defogger
AC024 Room lamp
Timer control AC034 Power window relay
AC023 Tail lamp
AC006 Buzzer
83A-102
83A
AC009 Combination meter warning lamp

All warning lamps come on when selecting OK (except for air bag and ABS warning lamps).
If any LED does not come on, replace the combination meter.
If all LEDs do not come on, check the combination meter for power and ground, IGN ON voltage.
Check
after repair
83A-103
83A
AC029 Combination meter - LCD

All segments on LCD come on when selecting OK.
If any segment on LCD does not come on, replace the combination meter.
If all segments on LCD do not come on, check the combination meter for power and ground, IGN
ON voltage.
Check
after repair
83A-104
83A
AC030 Engine coolant temperature gauge

The engine coolant temperature gauge goes up to H and comes back to the original position when
selecting OK.
If the engine coolant temperature gauge does not move, check the combination meter for power
and ground, IGN ON voltage.
If the engine coolant temperature gauge does not move at all or does not move smoothly, replace
the combination meter.
Check
after repair
83A-105
83A
AC032 Tachometer

The tachometer goes up to MAX and comes back to the original position when selecting OK.
If the tachometer does not move, check the combination meter for power and ground, IGN ON voltage.
If the tachometer does not move at all or does not move smoothly, replace the combination meter.
Check
after repair
83A-106
83A
AC030 Speedometer

The speedometer goes up to MAX and comes back to the original position when selecting OK.
If the speedometer does not move, check the combination meter for power and ground, IGN ON voltage.
If the speedometer does not move at all or does not move smoothly, replace the combination meter.
Check
after repair
83A-107
83A
AC020 Fuel gauge

The fuel gauge goes up to F and comes back to the original position when selecting OK.
If the fuel gauge does not move, check the combination meter for power and ground, IGN ON voltage.
If the fuel gauge does not move at all or does not move smoothly, replace the combination meter.
Check
after repair
83A-108
83A
AC017 LH turn signal lamp

All LH turn signal lamps (front, rear, side, indicator) come on for 5 seconds when selecting OK.
If any of them does not come on, repair the related circuit.
If all lamps do not come on, check the LH turn signal lamp circuit (M33 connector terminal No. 77, 78).
z If the ground control signal is detected while performing the active test, check the wiring
harness.
z If the ground control signal is not detected while performing the active test, replace the
combination meter.
Check
after repair
83A-109
83A
AC018 RH turn signal lamp

All RH turn signal lamps (front, rear, side, indicator) come on for 5 seconds when selecting OK.
If any lamp does not come on, repair the related circuit.
If all lamps do not come on, check the RH turn signal lamp circuit (M33 connector terminal No. 79, 80).
harness.
z If the ground control signal is not detected while performing the active test, replace the combi-
nation meter.
Check
after repair
83A-110
83A
AC019 Selector lever lock
There should be no current or historic failure record.

Note
(only for A/T equipped vehicle)

The selector lever cannot not be moved from P-range to other ranges even depressing the brake
pedal when selecting OK (for approx. 5 seconds).
If the selector lever is not locked, check the control circuit (M33 connector terminal No. 44).
harness.
nation meter.
Check
after repair
83A-111
83A
AC022 Rear defogger

The rear defogger turns on for approx. 5 seconds when selecting OK.
If the selector lever is not locked, check the control circuit (M33 connector terminal No. 61).
harness.
nation meter.
Check
after repair
83A-112
83A
AC024 Room lamp

The ignition key hole lamp and room lamp come on for 5 seconds when selecting OK.
(only when the room lamp is in Auto mode)
If the room lamp does not operate properly, check the control circuit (M33 connector terminal No. 47).
harness.
nation meter.
Check
after repair
83A-113
83A
AC034 Power window relay
Perform the active test while the ignition is in OFF position.

The power window relay turns on for 5 seconds when selecting OK.
If the power window relay does not operate properly, check the control circuit (M33 connector
terminal No. 76).
harness.
nation meter.
Check
after repair
83A-114
83A
AC023 Tail lamp

All tail lamps (front and rear) should be turned on for 5 seconds when selecting OK.
If the power window relay does not operate properly, check the control circuit (M33 connector
terminal No. 63).
harness.
nation meter.
Check
after repair
83A-115
83A
AC034 Buzzer

The buzzer sounds for approx. 5 seconds when selecting OK.
If the buzzer does not sound, replace the combination meter.
Check
after repair
83A-116
No Vdiag: 00 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS -CHECK BY SYMPTOMS
83A
NOTES
device.
Operation malfunction of combination meter
Cannot communicate with combination meter Chart 1
83A-117
No Vdiag: 00 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS -CHECK BY SYMPTOMS
83A
CHART 1 Cannot communicate with combination meter control unit.
Note It communicates with CLIP using CAN protocol.

If necessary, disconnect the CAN adapter and reconnect it again. If the fault still exists, contact
the call center.
Inspect the control unit communication line.
Disconnect the meter control unit, engine control unit and TCM control unit (only for A/T equipped
vehicle) connectors.
Check the continuity between control unit M30 terminal No. 37, 38 and body.
Check the voltage between control unit M30 terminal No. 37, 38 and body.
Check the continuity between the control unit M30 terminal No. 37 and 38.
Check the continuity between control unit M30 terminal No. 37, 39 and the diagnostic connector
terminal No. 14, 6.
Measure the resistance of CAN resister in ECU
Measure the resistance of CAN-H and CAN-L terminals of meter control unit.
Measure the resistance of CAN-H and CAN-L terminals in ECM.
Specified value: approx. 120Ω
If a fault is detected, replace the related parts.
Check
after repair
83A-118
TDB REMOTE CONTROLLER & SMART
No de Vdiag: 00 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - OVERVIEW
82D
1. Application
Vehicle type: SM3 06 MY ECU name: Combination meter

Function: Remote controller & Smart N Vdiag: 00

Diagnosis manual
Wiring diagram
Diagnostic device
CLIP

Multi-meter
3. Preparation
Procedure
82D-1
82D
Failure:

considered.
ing conditions.
detected.

Conformity check
In this step:
inspection.

but fault persists.
82D-2
82D

charge and fuse.

sheet.
technical bulletin)
Connect CLIP.
Connect ECU to No
communication.
Yes
Trouble diagnosis
Malfunction is No
Check conformity
detected.
Yes
persists completed
Yes
persists completed
Yes

82D-3
82D
Wiring inspection
Precaution
Visual inspection
Manual inspection
82D-4
82D
injury.

82D-5
82D
Lock/Unlock (Door lock/unlock & remote entry) function

Description
The doors can be locked and unlocked using the central door lock button or door lock knob.
The doors are unlocked automatically when the ignition key is in key cylinder and the driver’s door is open
even though the door lock knob or the central door lock button is ON.
The door lock lamp is turned ON when all doors are unlocked.
The auto door lock function by vehicle speed can be set in the control unit.
** Trouble diagnosis - Refer to the "Write configuration & programming".
Combination meter C/U double step - All doors are unlocked when there is collision signal input if the door
unlock is set to WITHOUT (hazard warning lamp ON).
** Trouble diagnosis - Refer to the "Write configuration & programming".
The door lock and door unlock function using remote controller is provided by the combination meter C/U
and key integrated remote controller.
The communication of remote controller and combination meter C/U is RF 433MHz.
Remote controller operating condition

Key is not in key cylinder while the ignition switch is in OFF position.
All doors are closed.
Both conditions should be met to use the remote entry system.
Description of remote controller operation
Door Lock: All doors are locked and the hazard warning lamp flashes twice when pressing the lock
button on the remote controller.
Door Unlock: All doors are unlocked and the hazard warning lamp flashes once when pressing the unlock
button on the remote controller.
The doors are locked again in 30 seconds after unlocking doors if there are not any signal
changes from driver’s door switch, other door switches, driver’s door unlock switch, key
switch, central door lock switch and remote controller lock button.
Panic Alarm: The panic alarm and the hazard warning lamp operate for 30 seconds when pressing the lock
button on the remote controller for more than 1.5 seconds.
The function is cancelled when pressing the unlock button on the remote controller while in
operation.
Trunk Unlock: The trunk is unlocked when pressing the trunk button on the remote controller for more than
0.5 seconds.
82D-6
82D
Remote controller registration
Close and lock the hood, trunk and all doors.
Insert the ignition key into the key cylinder and remove it.
Repeat this more than 6 times within 10 seconds.
** Outputs all doors unlocked.
Turn the ignition switch to ACC position.

Lock the doors using central door lock button or driver’s door lock knob.
Press the lock or unlock button on the remote controller to be registered.

** Outputs all doors unlocked.
Do you want to register another remote controller?
Open the driver’s door and turn the Lock the doors using central door lock
ignition switch to OFF position. button or driver’s door lock knob.
END (NOTE) Up to 4 remote controllers can be registered.
82D-7
82D
Anti-theft function
Description
The anti-theft function is applied only to the vehicle equipped with the remote entry system.
The anti-theft function is set if the doors are locked by the remote controller and the anti-theft indicator
displays the current condition.
Operating Conditions
Key is not in key cylinder while the ignition switch is in OFF position.
All doors are closed.
The doors are locked by the remote controller.
Above conditions should be met to activate the anti-theft function.
Work flow
1. Disarmed and Stand-by Mode

When hood, trunk or any door is open.
When the alarm function is completed or canceled by driver.
2. Armed Mode
When hood, trunk and all doors are closed and locked by the remote controller.
When the doors are locked again by auto door lock function.
3. Alarm Mode
When door switch, hood switch, trunk room lamp switch, or door unlock switch is ON or the battery
cables are reconnected in armed mode.
The hazard warning lamp relay, horn relay and anti-theft relay operate for 30 seconds to activate alarm
function and the engine cannot be started.
82D-8
82D
To Stop Alarm Function

To stop alarm, unlock the doors and trunk by remote controller, turn the ignition switch to ON position, or
open a door.
82D-9
No de Vdiag: 00 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - CIRCUIT DIAGRAM & WIRING DIAGRAM
82D
Lock & Unlock/Remote Entry System Circuit Diagram
82D-10
82D
Wiring Diagram EL/Lock-unlock-01
82D-11
82D
82D-12
82D
82D-13
82D
82D-14
82D
Anti-theft System Circuit Diagram
82D-15
82D
Wiring Diagram EL/Theft warning-01
82D-16
82D
82D-17
82D
82D-18
No de Vdiag: 00 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - WRITE CONFIGURATION & PROGRHAMING
82D
Required device
RSM CLIP Mater CD ver 2
Various configuration settings for combination meter

The following items should be set to use the various control functions of combination meter correctly.
Make sure to record the following values before replacing the combination meter so that they can be set to
new combination meter correctly.
Setting value
Write Read Possible setting
Setting item (new combi- Others
configuration Configuration values
nation meter)
CF164 LC081 Vehicle speed input source (Note 1) ABS, transmission Transmission
CF160 LC076 Over speed alarm WITH, WITHOUT WITH For Middle East
CF158 LC064 Seat belt reminder buzzer WITH, WITHOUT WITH
CF161 LC078 Auto door lock while driving (Note 2) WITH, WITHOUT WITHOUT
CF165 LC082 Double step - Door unlock (Note 3) WITH, WITHOUT WITHOUT For Export
CF169 LC086 With engine immobilizer (Note 4) YES, NO NO
CF170 LC087 Without engine immobilizer (Note 4) YES, NO YES
CF162 LC079 Multi-remote entry WITH, WITHOUT WITH
CF166 LC083 Seat belt warning - vehicle speed 10,15,20 10 Km/h
CF167 LC084 Seat belt warning - operating time 0,30,60,90,120 60 sec
CF168 LC085 Auto door lock - vehicle speed 8, 40 40 km/h
CF163 LC080 Transmission (Note 5) Manual/Automatic Manual -
(Note 1) It should be set to ABS for the vehicle equipped with ABS.
(Note 2) It can be set manually. (The setting value is changed when pressing the central door lock
switch for more than 5 seconds with the ignition switch ON.)
(Note 3) This function is for export, so set it to WITHOUT for domestic vehicle.
(Note 4) It is to set the value to the vehicle equipped with immobilizer. Refer to K9K service manual.
(Note 5) If Manual is set to the vehicle equipped with automatic transaxle, the selector lever information
is not displayed.
82D-19
82D
Reading The Configuration

z Monitor the setting value with read configuration function.
82D-20
82D
Changing the configuration

z Select Write configuration.
z Select the item to be set.
z Check the vehicle setting, select the correct value and select OK.
z Check if the set items have been changed in Read configuration mode.
z The system should be initialized in other configuration function or the ignition switch should be turned
OFF and ON again to store the set configuration to the combination meter C/U (EEPROM).
z Make sure that the set value is correct in Read configuration mode.
82D-21
No de Vdiag: 00 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - DTC LIST
82D
DTC label DTC Items Remarks

DF025 9403 Control unit (EEPROM)
DF030 9406 Engine immobilizer
DF043 940B Power window relay circuit
DF046 940D Door lock relay circuit
DF047 940E Driver’s door unlock relay circuit
DF048 940F Other door unlock relay circuit
DF042 9411 Alarm relay circuit
DF049 9412 Air bag collision circuit
DF053 9418 Anti-theft relay circuit
DF007 9401 Fuel gauge sensor circuit
DF027 9404 Turn signal lamp circuit - RH
DF028 9405 Turn signal lamp circuit - LH
DF031 9407 Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch
DF041 9408 Rear defroster relay circuit Refer to the combination
meter section for fault
DF044 940A Tail lamp relay circuit description.
DF045 940C Battery saver relay circuit
DF050 9414 Engine coolant temperature output circuit
DF051 9416 Vehicle speed output circuit 1 (2-pulse)
DF052 9417 Vehicle speed output circuit 2 (8-pulse)
82D-22
No de Vdiag: 00 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - FAULT DESCRIPTION
82D
DF019
Battery voltage
Current or
History 3.DEF: Abnormal voltage
DTC
Detecting 3.DEF: If the battery voltage is over 16 V
Condition
Measure the battery voltage.

Start the engine and measure the battery voltage and charging voltage.
Specified value - approx. 13 V
Check the voltage between the control unit M33 terminal No. 58 and terminal No. 14, 69, 70
: Power supply voltage
Check the voltage between the control unit M33 terminal No. 59 and terminal No. 71
Check
after repair
82D-23
82D
DF025
Control unit - EEPROM
Current or
History DEF: Internal circuit fault
DTC
Detecting DEF: If the setting for control unit EEPROM if failed
Condition

Erase the fault. If the fault cannot be erased, replace the combination meter.
Check
after repair
82D-24
82D
DF030
Current or Engine immobilizer circuit
History
DTC
Detecting This is the data only for K9K vehicle. ** Refer to K9K service manual.
Condition
Check
after repair
82D-25
82D
DF043
Power window relay circuit
Current or
DTC
When operating the power window relay
Detecting
Condition CC.1: If the power window relay control consumes more voltage than estimated
Check the control voltage of power window relay.

For 30 seconds after turning the ignition from ON to OFF - approx. 1 V
After 30 seconds from when turning the ignition from ON to OFF Battery voltage
Check the power window relay control circuit for short to power.
Disconnect the power window relay, folding mirror relay and combination meter connectors.
Check
after repair
82D-26
82D
DF046
Door lock relay circuit
Current or
DTC
When operating the door lock relay
Detecting
Condition CC.1: If the door lock relay control consumes more voltage than estimated
Check the control voltage of door lock relay.

Door locked - approx. 1 V
Check the door lock relay control circuit for short to power.
Disconnect the door lock relay and combination meter connectors.
Check
after repair
82D-27
82D
DF047, DF048 Driver’s door unlock relay circuit

Current or Other door unlock relay circuit
DTC
When operating the door unlock relay
Detecting
Condition CC.1: If the door unlock relay control consumes more voltage than estimated
Check the control voltage of door unlock relay.

Door locked - approx. 1 V
Check the door unlock relay control circuit for short to power.
Disconnect the door lock relay and combination meter connectors.
Check
after repair
82D-28
82D
DF042
Alarm relay circuit
Current or
DTC
When operating the alarm relay
Detecting
Condition CC.1: If the alarm relay control consumes more voltage than estimated
Check the control voltage of alarm relay.

Alarm relay controlled - approx. 1 V
Check the alarm relay control circuit for short to power.
Disconnect the horn relay and combination meter connectors.
Check
after repair
82D-29
82D
DF049
Air bag collision circuit
Current or
History 1.DEF: No signal
1.DEF: If there is no air bag collision signal input within 3 seconds after turning
DTC the ignition ON
Detecting
If there is no diagnosis pulse within 1.5 seconds after generating the
Condition
diagnosis pulse
Check the continuity of the air bag collision circuit.

Disconnect the meter control unit and air bag control unit connectors.
The meter control unit M30 connector terminal No. 15 and the air bag control unit B 15 connector
terminal No. 48
Check the continuity between the air bag collision circuit and body.
Check the continuity between the meter control unit M30 connector terminal No. 15 and body.
Specified value: Continuity should no exist.
Check the air bag collision circuit for short to power.
Check the voltage between the meter control unit M30 connector terminal No. 15 and body.
Replace the air bag unit and combination meter control unit if the fault stays.
Check
after repair
82D-30
82D
DF053
Anti-theft relay circuit
Current or
DTC
When operating the anti-theft relay
Detecting
Condition CC.1: If the anti-theft relay control consumes more voltage than estimated
Check the control voltage of anti-theft relay.

Anti-theft relay controlled - approx. 1 V
Check the anti-theft relay control circuit for short to power.
Disconnect the anti-theft relay and combination meter connectors.
Check
after repair
82D-31
No de Vdiag: 00 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - CONFORMITY CHECK
82D

NOTES
Procedure Label Status or Parameter Reference value and notes Trouble diagnosis
The data detected from the
Vehicle speed 1 Vehicle speed according to
1 PR020 vehicle speed sensor in
(Note 1) driving condition
transmission is displayed.
If this vehicle speed is
2 PR021 Vehicle speed 2 Vehicle speed according to faulty, perform trouble
(Note 1) driving condition diagnosis for ABS C/U.
(Note 1) If the vehicle speed input source is ABS in Read configuration mode, vehicle speed 1
does not output the data. And, if it is Transmission, vehicle speed 2 does not output the data.
82D-32
82D

NOTES Perform the conformity test and judge the status according to the reference value.
Lock & Unlock
Trouble
Procedure Label Status or Parameter Reference value and notes
diagnosis
ET197 Key-in switch ON
ET185 Central door lock button ON when locked
ET206 Lock relay control ON when locked
ET231 Door locking lamp ON when tail lamp is ON
ET225 Driver’s door unlock relay control ON when unlocking driver’s door
ET226 Other door unlock relays control ON when unlocking other doors
ET053 Driver’s door LOCK when driver’s door is locked
ET009 Passenger’s door LOCK when passenger’s door is locked
ET190 Driver’s door switch ON when opening/OFF when closing
ET191 All door switches OFF when all doors are closed
ET227 Trunk open actuator ON when opening/OFF when closing
ET222 Residual voltage control ON while controlling residual voltage
ET067 R.F. frame reception YES when receiving remote controller signal
ET060 RF KEY - Valid YES when remote controller signal is valid
ON when pressing
ET240 Remote controller lock button 1
remot controller lock button
ON when pressing
ET242 Remote controller unlock button 1
remote controller unlock button
ON when pressing and holding

remote controller lock button
ON when pressing and holding

remote controller lock button
Final door opening source

ET061 Final door open source D ~ door lock switch
R ~ remote controller
ET352 LH turn signal lamp control ON when controlling LH turn signal lamp
ET351 RH turn signal lamp control ON when controlling RH turn signal lamp
82D-33
82D

NOTES
Anti-theft
Trouble
diagnosis
1 ET191 All door switches OFF when all doors are closed
2 ET196 Hood switch ON when hood is open
3 ET195 Trunk room lamp switch ON when trunk is open
4 ET053 Driver’s door LOCK when driver’s door is locked
LOCK when passenger’s and rear
5 ET009 Passenger’s door
doors are closed
6 ET002 IGN ON switch ON
ON when pressing lock button
7 ET240 Remote controller lock button 1
after turning ignition OFF
ON when pressing unlock button
8 ET242 Remote controller unlock button 1
after turning ignition OFF
9 ET228 Anti-theft relay control ON when operating anti-theft relay
10 ET229 Horn relay control ON when operating horn
82D-34
82D

NOTES Perform the conformity test and judge the status according to the reference value.
Protection (Immobilizer)
(CAUTION) Refer to K9K service manual.
Trouble
diagnosis
ET211 Key - Blank
ET208 BCM - Blank
ET212 ECM - Blank
ET209 Key code - Valid
ET236 Key code - Registration
ET232 Response - Confirmation
ET233 Response - Recognition
ET237 AS CODE - Available
ET238 AS code - Recognition
ET239 Standard key
PR014 IGN ON counter
PR015 Number of registered keys
82D-35
No de Vdiag: 00 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - STATUS AND PARAMETERS LIST
82D
Status and Parameters Number Status and Parameters Name Remarks

ET197 Key-in switch
ET002 IGN ON switch
ET185 Central door lock button
ET206 Lock relay control
ET231 Door locking lamp
ET225 Driver’s door unlock relay control
ET226 Other door unlock relays control
ET009 Passenger’s door
ET190 Driver’s door switch
ET227 Trunk open actuator
ET222 Residual voltage control
ET067 R.F. frame reception
ET060 RF KEY - Valid
ET061 Final door open source
ET196 Hood switch
ET228 Anti-theft relay control
ET229 Horn relay control
ET211 Key - Blank
ET208 BCM - Blank
ET212 ECM - Blank
ET209 Key code - Valid
ET236 Key code - Registration
ET232 Response - Confirmation
ET233 Response - Recognition
ET237 AS CODE - Available
ET238 AS code - Recognition
ET239 Standard key
PR014 IGN ON counter
PR015 Number of registered keys
82D-36
No de Vdiag: 00 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - STATUS AND PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION
82D
ET009 Passenger’s door (other doors)
All doors (except driver’s door) are locked - LOCK

Note
Any door (except driver’s door) is unlocked - UNLOCK
All doors (except driver’s door) are locked - approx. 11 V
Check
after repair
82D-37
82D
ET227 Trunk open actuator
Trunk open actuator is in operation - ON

Note
Trunk open actuator is not in operation - OFF
Under remote controller operating conditions,
When pressing trunk open button on remote controller - Ground voltage
Others - Battery voltage
Check
after repair
82D-38
82D
ET197 Key-in switch
Note It indicates the conditions of key-in switch.
Check the power supply of control unit M30 connector terminal No. 28.
Key inserted - approx. 12 V
Key removed - approx. 0 V
Check
after repair
82D-39
82D
ET002 IGN ON switch
Note N/A
IGN SW ON - approx. 12 V
Check
after repair
82D-40
82D
ET197 Central door lock button
Note N/A
When pressing door lock button - approx. 0 V
Check
after repair
82D-41
82D
ET206 Door lock relay control
Note N/A
When pressing door lock button - approx. 0 V
Others - 12 V
Check
after repair
82D-42
82D
ET231 Door locking lamp
Note N/A
Door locked - 0 V
Others - 12 V
Check
after repair
82D-43
82D
ET225 Driver’s door unlock relay control

ET226 Other door unlock relays control
Note Double step type door unlock equipped vehicle
Check the power supply of control unit M33 connector terminal No. 62, 42.
When pressing door unlock button - approx. 0 V
Check
after repair
82D-44
82D
Note It indicates the conditions of driver’s door unlock switch.
Driver’s door unlocked - approx. 0 V
Check
after repair
82D-45
82D
ET190 Driver’s door switch
Note It indicates the open and close status of driver’s door.
Driver’s door open - approx. 0 V
Check
after repair
82D-46
82D
Note It indicates the open and close status of all doors including the driver’s door.
Check
after repair
82D-47
82D
ET222 Residual voltage control
When turning the power window relay & folding mirror relay ON - ON
Note
When turning the power window relay & folding mirror relay OFF - OFF
For 30 seconds after turning the ignition switch to OFF from O - approx. 0 V
After 30 seconds from when turning the ignition switch to OFF from ON - approx. 12 V
Check
after repair
82D-48
82D
ET191 R.F. frame reception
Only for the vehicle with remote controller.

When receiving the signals from registered remote controller - YES
Note
When receiving the signals from unregistered remote controller - NO
(Note) Perform the test only under the remote controller operating conditions.
If YES is indicated when pressing the button on the normal remote controller (same model).
Check the battery voltage of remote controller.
Specified value: approx. 2.5 - 3 V
If necessary, replace the battery and test it again. If NG is still indicated, replace the remote controller.
If NO is indicated when pressing the button on the normal remote controller (same model).
Check the power supply and ground of remote keyless control unit.
Check the voltage of the remote keyless C/U M75 connector terminal No. 1 and 4.
Specified value: 5 V
If NO is indicated when pressing the button on the normal remote controller (same model).
Check the continuity between meter control unit and remote keyless control unit.
Disconnect the meter control unit and remote keyless control unit connectors.
The meter C/U M30 connector terminal No. 22 and the remote keyless C/U M75 connector terminal No. 3
Meter C/U M30 connector terminal No. 22 and ground
Replace the remote keyless control unit or meter control unit if the fault stays.
Check
after repair
82D-49
82D
ET067 RF KEY - Valid
Note If the remote controller is registered - YES
If the remote controller is not registered - NO
Remote controller re-registration

Registered the remote controller and perform the test again.
Check
after repair
82D-50
82D

Note When briefly pressing the lock/unlock button on the registered remote controller - ON
When pressing the lock/unlock button on the unregistered remote controller - OFF

If necessary, replace the battery and test it again. If NG is still indicated, replace the remote controller.
Check
after repair
82D-51
82D

When pressing and holding the lock/unlock button on the registered remote controller - ON
Note
When pressing and holding the lock/unlock button on the unregistered remote
controller - OFF

If necessary, replace the battery and test it again. If NG is still indicated, replace the remote
controller.
Check
after repair
82D-52
82D
ET061 Final door open source
Final door open source is the remote controller - R

Note
Final door open source is the door lock button - D
The signal source of final door unlock can be checked.
Check
after repair
82D-53
82D
When turning on LH turn signal lamp - ON and OFF

Note
Others - OFF
**(NOTE) The turn signal lamp does not come on if both terminals (No. 77 and 78) are defective.
Check
after repair
82D-54
82D

Note
Others - OFF
When controlling RH turn signal lamp - approx. 0 V and 12 V repeatedly
**(NOTE)The turn signal lamp does not come on if both terminals (No. 79 and 80) are defective.
Check
after repair
82D-55
82D
ET196 Hood switch
Hood open - ON
Note
Hood closed - OFF
Hood closed - approx. 11 V
Hood open - approx. 0 V
Check
after repair
82D-56
82D

Note
Others - OFF
Trunk closed - approx. 11 V
Trunk open - approx. 1 V
Check
after repair
82D-57
82D
ET196 Anti-theft relay control
When operating anti-theft relay during alarm operation - ON

Note
Other - OFF
IGN SW ON - approx. 12 V
During alarm operation with IGN SW OFF - approx. 0 V
Check
after repair
82D-58
82D
ET229 Horn relay control
When operating horn or alarm buzzer - ON

Note
Others - OFF
When horn switch is OFF or anti-theft is not in operation - approx. 12 V
When horn switch is ON or anti-theft is in operation - approx. 0 V
Check
after repair
82D-59
No de Vdiag: 00 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - ACTIVE TEST LIST
82D
Active Test List Item

RZ001 Fault memory
AC036
Door lock relay
AC037
Other door unlock relays
AC038
Door locking lamp
AC028
Turn signal lamp - LH
AC017
Turn signal lamp - RH
AC018
Power window relay
AC034
Trunk
AC025
AC026 Anti-theft relay
AC027 Horn relay
82D-60
No de Vdiag: 00 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - ACTIVE TEST DESCRIPTION
82D
AC036 Door lock relay

All doors should be locked when selecting OK.
If any door is not locked,
check the circuit of the corresponding door lock actuator referring to the wiring diagram.
Check the voltage of door lock relay control circuit if all doors are not locked.
Active Test command in progress - approx. 0 V
Check
after repair
82D-61
82D
AC037 Driver’s door unlock relay

AC038 Other door unlock relays
There should be no current or historic failure record.

Note For the vehicle without double step type door unlock, both active tests are
performed by all doors unlock operation.

All doors should be unlocked when selecting OK.
If any door is not unlocked,
check the circuit of the corresponding door lock actuator referring to the wiring diagram.
Check the voltage of door unlock relay control circuit if all doors are not unlocked.
Active Test command in progress - Approx. 0 V
Check
after repair
82D-62
82D
AC028 Door locking lamp

The door lock lamp (lock symbol) should come on when selecting OK.
If it does not come on, check the control voltage of door lock lamp.
Replace the door lock switch.
Check
after repair
82D-63
82D
AC017 Turn signal lamp - LH

All LH turn signal lamps (front, rear, side, indicator) come on for 5 seconds when selecting OK.
If the ground control signal is detected while performing the active command, check the wiring
harness.
If the ground control signal is not detected while performing the active command, replace the
combination meter.
Check
after repair
82D-64
82D
AC018 Turn signal lamp - RH

All RH turn signal lamps (front, rear, side, indicator) come on for 5 seconds when selecting OK.
If the ground control signal is detected while performing the active command, check the wiring
harness.
If the ground control signal is not detected while performing the active command, replace the
combination meter.
Check
after repair
82D-65
82D
AC034 Power window relay

The power window and folding mirror relay is ON when selecting OK.
If the relay is not ON, check the control voltage of power window and folding mirror relay.
Check
after repair
82D-66
82D
AC025 Trunk

The trunk should be unlocked when selecting OK.
If it is not unlocked, check the trunk open control voltage.
Check
after repair
82D-67
82D
AC026 Anti-theft relay

The anti-theft relay should be ON when selecting OK.
If the relay is not ON, check the anti-theft relay control voltage.
Check
after repair
82D-68
82D
AC027 Horn relay

The horn relay should be ON when selecting OK.
If relay is not ON, check the horn relay control voltage.
Check
after repair
82D-69
No de Vdiag: 00 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - CHECK BY SYMPTOMS
82D
NOTES
device.
Operation malfunction of combination meter
Cannot communicate with combination meter Chart 1
82D-70
82D
CHART 1 Cannot communicate with combination meter control unit.
Note It communicates with CLIP using CAN protocol.

If necessary, disconnect the CAN adapter and reconnect it again. If the fault still exists, contact the call center.
Inspect the control unit communication line.
Disconnect the meter control unit, engine control unit and TCM control unit (only for A/T equipped
vehicle) connectors.
Check the continuity between control unit M30 terminal No. 37, 38 and body.
Check the voltage between control unit M30 terminal No. 37, 38 and body.
Check the continuity between the control unit M30 terminal No. 37 and 38.
Check the continuity between control unit M30 terminal No. 37, 39 and the diagnostic connector
terminal No. 14, 6.
Measure the resistance of CAN resister in ECU
Measure the resistance of CAN-H and CAN-L terminals of meter control unit.
Measure the resistance of CAN-H and CAN-L terminals in ECM.
If a fault is detected, replace the related parts.
Check
after repair
82D-71
AAP PARKING AID SYSTEM
87V
1. Application
Vehicle type: SM3 06 MY ECU name: Parking aid control unit

Function: Parking aid N Vdiag: 00

Diagnosis manual
Wiring diagram
Diagnostic device
CLIP

Multi-meter
3. Preparation
Procedure
87V-1
87V
Failure:

considered.
ing conditions.
detected.

Conformity check
In this step:
inspection.

but fault persists.
87V-2
87V

charge and fuse.

sheet.
technical bulletin)
Connect CLIP.
Connect ECU to No
communication.
Yes
Trouble diagnosis
Malfunction is No
Check conformity
detected.
Yes
persists completed
Yes
persists completed
Yes

87V-3
87V
Wiring inspection
Precaution
Visual inspection
Manual inspection
87V-4
87V
injury.

87V-5
87V
Description
The Parking Aid System is a system that detects the blind spots in the rear area of the vehicle during
reverse driving using an ultrasonic wave system and alerts the driver with a sound according to the dis-
tance to obstacles.
Operating Conditions
The system operates only when ignition switch is “ON” position, selector lever is at “R” position, and
parking brake is released.
Operation
z The alarm operates based on the nearest obstacle.
z If the parking brake input signal is ON (parked) or the circuit is open, the alarm does not operate.
z RL and RR sensors detect the obstacles in 3 different distance stages for the alarm.
z SL and SR sensors detect the obstacles in 2 distance stages for the alarm (starting from 2nd alarm).
Distance for alarm

z 1st alarm: approx. 81 ~ 120 cm (intermittent sound)
z 2nd alarm: approx. 41 ~ 80 cm (intermittent sound)
z 3rd alarm: approx. 0 ~ 40 cm (continuous sound)
Cautions for Parking Aid System

Under the following cases, the system may not operate properly.
The sensor may not detect following objects.

z Sharp or thin objects like wire, rope, and chain.
z Cotton, sponge and snow that absorb ultrasonic waves.
z Obstacles under the bumper.
System cannot operate properly.

z When sensors are frozen. (operates normally after thawed)
z When sensor surfaces are blocked by foreign materials like snow or mud. (operates normally after cleaned)
z When receiving other ultrasonic waves (metalic sound, air braking sounds from heavy commercial vehicles)
z When using high power radio equipment.
z Sensing scopes can be narrowed.
z When sensor surfaces are partially blocked by foreign materials like snow or mud.
z When extremely hot (over 60 )
z When extremely cold (below -20 )
System may not operate properly, but it’s not a malfunction

z When reversing on the rough roads, gravel roads, hill and grass.
z When the vehicle height varies according to loads.
z When there is heavy rain or spray.
z When receiving other ultrasonic waves (horn, engine sounds of motorcycle, air braking sounds from
heavy commercial vehicles)
87V-6
87V
System Self-Diagnosis Function

The self diagnosis function checks the system when the ignition switch is ON and the gear selector lever
is at “R” position. It indicates the conditions with buzzer operation.
Normal
The buzzer sounds one long “beep” (for 0.3 sec.) after 0.5 seconds from when turning the ignition switch
ON and receiving “R” position signal.
Defective
The buzzer sounds three “beeps” with the specific interval after 0.5 seconds from when turning the ignition
switch ON and receiving “R” position signal.
When the system is defective (sounds 3 beeps), it cannot operate properly.
87V-7
No de Vdiag: 00 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
87V
Parking aid system wiring diagram
87V-8
87V
Wiring Diagram EL/PAS-01
87V-9
87V
Wiring Diagram EL/PAS-02
87V-10
No de Vdiag: 00 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - DTC LIST
87V
DTC List Items

DF008 Control unit
DF002 Parking aid sensor - SL
DF003 Parking aid sensor - RL
DF004 Parking aid sensor - SR
DF005 Parking aid sensor - RR
87V-11
87V
Control unit
DF008
DEF : ECU internal fault
DTC When the internal calculation function in control unit detects an error
Detecting (NOTE) This fault is always displayed as Current since PAS C/U doesn’t have
Condition fault memory function.
Check the power supply and ground circuits of PAS control unit.
Check the voltage between PAS C/U T11 connector terminal No. 11 and terminal No. 13, 12.
Specified value: Battery voltage
Replace the PAS control unit.
Check
after repair
87V-12
87V
DF002 Parking aid sensor - SL

DF003 Parking aid sensor - RL
DF004 Parking aid sensor - SR
DF005 Parking aid sensor - RR
When the voltage is not supplied properly due to the defective sensor power
DTC supply circuit.
Detecting
The data cannot be exchanged due to the open circuit of TX or RX.
Condition
Sensor ground circuit is open.
Check the power supply of PAS sensor.

Check the voltage between PAS C/U T11 connector terminal No. 17 and 16.
Specified value: approx. 8 V
Check the continuity of PAS control unit signal line.
Disconnect the PAS control unit and parking aid sensor connectors.
PAS C/U T11 connector terminal No. 5, 6 and the parking aid sensor
SL T52 connector terminal No. 1, 3
PAS C/U T11 connector terminal No. 3, 4 and the parking aid senso
RL T53 connector terminal No. 1, 3
RR T54 connector terminal No. 1, 3
SR T55 connector terminal No. 1, 3
PAS C/U T11 connector terminal No. 5, 6 and body ground
Replace the parking aid sensor that causes DTC.
Check
after repair
87V-13
87V

NOTES
Main data & Parking aid
Procedure Label Status Reference value and notes Trouble diagnosis

OK or N is displayed as the status
1 ET005 Sensor power N means NG.
of sensor power.
ON is displayed when engaging
2 ET004 Parking switch
parking switch.
ON is displayed when the selector
3 ET001 Reverse switch
lever is in R-range.
87V-14
No de Vdiag: 00 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - STATUS AND PARAMETERS LIST
87V
Status List Status Name

ET005 Sensor power
ET004 Parking switch
87V-15
87V
ET005 Sensor power
It indicates the conditions of supplied power to the parking aid sensor from the
control unit.
Note
Sensor power is within the specified range - OK
Sensor power is out of the specified range - N (NG)
Replace the control unit if the fault stays.
Check
after repair
87V-16
87V
ET004 Parking brake switch
Parking brake applied - ON

Note
Parking brake released - OFF
Check the signal of the parking brake switch.

Check the voltage between PAS C/U T11 connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
Specified value: When parking brake is applied: Ground voltage
When parking brake is released: Power supply voltage
Check
after repair
87V-17
87V
In R range - ON
Note
Others - OFF
Check the signal of the inhibitor switch.

Check the voltage between PAS C/U T11 connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
Specified value: In R range - approx. 12 V
In ranges other than R - approx. 0 V
Check
after repair
87V-18
No de Vdiag: 00 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - ACTIVE TEST LIST
87V
Active Command List Name

AC055 Buzzer
87V-19
87V
AC055 Buzzer

The buzzer should sound for 5 seconds and stop when selecting OK.
If the buzzer does not sound, check the ground of buzzer.
Voltage between the buzzer M54 connector terminal No. 1 and M54 terminal No. 3
If the buzzer does not sound, check the continuity of the buzzer signal line.
Disconnect the buzzer and the parking aid control unit connectors.
Buzzer M54 connector terminal No. 2 and the parking aid control unit T11 connector terminal No. 14
Replace the buzzer.
Replace the control unit.
Check
after repair
87V-20
87V
Refer to the "Check by symptoms" after completing the inspection using the diagnostic
NOTES
device.
Operation malfunction of PAS control unit
It cannot communicate with PAS control unit Chart 1
87V-21
87V
CHART 1 Cannot communicate with PAS control unit
Note Refer to the “Check by symptoms” after completing the inspection using the
diagnostic device.
Repair the circuit if necessary. If a fault is detected, repair the related circuit.
Check the continuity of PAS control unit communication line.
Disconnect the PAS control unit connector.
PAS C/U T11 connector terminal No. 15 and the diagnostic connector M9 terminal No. 7
Check
after repair
87V-22

New SM3 Service Manual Supplement

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

New SM3 Service Manual Supplement

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GENERAL INFORMATION

z When there is no need of the battery power, always place the

z Do not touch hot components such as radiator, exhaust mani-

Precautions in Wireless System Installation

The conventional unit can be used as SI unit.

Manual Description Order

Sealing point. Adjustment needed.

z Male and female terminals

2-3. MULTIPLE SWITCH

2-5. SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)

2-6. JOINT CONNECTOR

The section is broken into the six following topics:

2-2. VEHICLE VIBRATION

2-3. CONNECTORS & HARNESS

2-5. SENSORS & RELAYS

2-6. TESTER PROBE

2-7. ENGINE COMPARTMENT

2-8. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-9. UNDER SEATING AREAS

2-10. HEAT SENSITIVE

2-12. WATER INTRUSION

2-13. ELECTRICAL LOAD

2-14. COLD OR HOT START UP

3-2. TESTING FOR “OPENS” IN THE CIRCUIT

3-3. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD

3-4. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD

3-5. TESTING FOR “SHORT” IN THE CIRCUIT

3-6 RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD

3-7. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD

3-8. GROUND INSPECTION

3-9. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS

3-10. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD

3-11. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP BY STEP

1. Connect the voltmeter as shown, starting at the battery and

COMPONENT VOLTAGE DROP

3-12. CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST

Input-output voltage chart

The voltage value is based on the body ground.

Input-output voltage chart

The voltage value is based on the body round.

z When the harness connector is viewed from the B-direction (at

ASSEMBLY SUCH AS CONTROL UNIT

INSPECTION FROM HARNESS

INSPECTION FROM TERMINALS

z Inspect after removing the retainer for female terminals with-

z When fuses or fusible links are shorted, examine the cause

z For lock-type connectors, first disconnect the lock at the

Control Unit and Electronic Components

z When disconnecting ECU harness connector, push out the

z For lever lock type removal, disconnect the connector by lift-

z For lever lock type installation, place the lever to B-direction

z During circuit testing, be careful not to place the proves too

GARAGE JACK AND RIGID RACK SUPPORT POINTS

DOUBLE-POST LIFT SUPPORT POINTS

BOARD-ON LIFT SUPPORT POINTS

RENAULT SAMSUNG recommends that vehicle be towed with the

TOWING AN AUTOMATIC TRANS AXLE MODEL WITH FOUR

TOWING AN AUTOMATIC TRANS AXLE MODEL WITH REAR

Description for Vehicle Model Name

F: Automatic 5-gear transaxle

L: Left hand drive

A: Front wheel drive

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

1 Country of origin: Korea